blob: dd0d441a4da6b43b41e24f44f8418dec7ba7964f [file] [log] [blame]
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00001//===- SimplifyCFG.cpp - Code to perform CFG simplification ---------------===//
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00002//
John Criswell482202a2003-10-20 19:43:21 +00003// The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
4//
Chris Lattnerf3ebc3f2007-12-29 20:36:04 +00005// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
6// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00007//
John Criswell482202a2003-10-20 19:43:21 +00008//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00009//
Chris Lattnera704ac82002-10-08 21:36:33 +000010// Peephole optimize the CFG.
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +000011//
12//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
13
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000014#include "llvm/ADT/APInt.h"
15#include "llvm/ADT/ArrayRef.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000016#include "llvm/ADT/DenseMap.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000017#include "llvm/ADT/Optional.h"
Chandler Carruth6bda14b2017-06-06 11:49:48 +000018#include "llvm/ADT/STLExtras.h"
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +000019#include "llvm/ADT/SetOperations.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000020#include "llvm/ADT/SetVector.h"
21#include "llvm/ADT/SmallPtrSet.h"
22#include "llvm/ADT/SmallVector.h"
23#include "llvm/ADT/Statistic.h"
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +000024#include "llvm/ADT/StringRef.h"
Peter Collingbourne0609acc2017-02-15 03:01:11 +000025#include "llvm/Analysis/AssumptionCache.h"
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +000026#include "llvm/Analysis/ConstantFolding.h"
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +000027#include "llvm/Analysis/EHPersonalities.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000028#include "llvm/Analysis/InstructionSimplify.h"
Chandler Carruthd3e73552013-01-07 03:08:10 +000029#include "llvm/Analysis/TargetTransformInfo.h"
David Blaikie31b98d22018-06-04 21:23:21 +000030#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/Local.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000031#include "llvm/Analysis/ValueTracking.h"
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +000032#include "llvm/IR/Attributes.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000033#include "llvm/IR/BasicBlock.h"
Chandler Carruth1305dc32014-03-04 11:45:46 +000034#include "llvm/IR/CFG.h"
Chandler Carruth6bda14b2017-06-06 11:49:48 +000035#include "llvm/IR/CallSite.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000036#include "llvm/IR/Constant.h"
Chandler Carruth8cd041e2014-03-04 12:24:34 +000037#include "llvm/IR/ConstantRange.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000038#include "llvm/IR/Constants.h"
39#include "llvm/IR/DataLayout.h"
40#include "llvm/IR/DerivedTypes.h"
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +000041#include "llvm/IR/Function.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000042#include "llvm/IR/GlobalValue.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000043#include "llvm/IR/GlobalVariable.h"
44#include "llvm/IR/IRBuilder.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000045#include "llvm/IR/InstrTypes.h"
46#include "llvm/IR/Instruction.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000047#include "llvm/IR/Instructions.h"
48#include "llvm/IR/IntrinsicInst.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000049#include "llvm/IR/Intrinsics.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000050#include "llvm/IR/LLVMContext.h"
51#include "llvm/IR/MDBuilder.h"
52#include "llvm/IR/Metadata.h"
53#include "llvm/IR/Module.h"
Chandler Carruth64396b02014-03-04 12:05:47 +000054#include "llvm/IR/NoFolder.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000055#include "llvm/IR/Operator.h"
Chandler Carruth820a9082014-03-04 11:08:18 +000056#include "llvm/IR/PatternMatch.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000057#include "llvm/IR/Type.h"
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +000058#include "llvm/IR/Use.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000059#include "llvm/IR/User.h"
60#include "llvm/IR/Value.h"
61#include "llvm/Support/Casting.h"
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +000062#include "llvm/Support/CommandLine.h"
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +000063#include "llvm/Support/Debug.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000064#include "llvm/Support/ErrorHandling.h"
Craig Topperb45eabc2017-04-26 16:39:58 +000065#include "llvm/Support/KnownBits.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000066#include "llvm/Support/MathExtras.h"
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +000067#include "llvm/Support/raw_ostream.h"
Chandler Carruthaafe0912012-06-29 12:38:19 +000068#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/BasicBlockUtils.h"
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +000069#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/ValueMapper.h"
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +000070#include <algorithm>
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000071#include <cassert>
72#include <climits>
73#include <cstddef>
74#include <cstdint>
75#include <iterator>
Chris Lattner5edb2f32004-10-18 04:07:22 +000076#include <map>
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000077#include <set>
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +000078#include <tuple>
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000079#include <utility>
80#include <vector>
81
Chris Lattnerdf3c3422004-01-09 06:12:26 +000082using namespace llvm;
Benjamin Kramer37172222013-07-04 14:22:02 +000083using namespace PatternMatch;
Brian Gaeke960707c2003-11-11 22:41:34 +000084
Chandler Carruth964daaa2014-04-22 02:55:47 +000085#define DEBUG_TYPE "simplifycfg"
86
James Molloy1b6207e2015-02-13 10:48:30 +000087// Chosen as 2 so as to be cheap, but still to have enough power to fold
88// a select, so the "clamp" idiom (of a min followed by a max) will be caught.
89// To catch this, we need to fold a compare and a select, hence '2' being the
90// minimum reasonable default.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +000091static cl::opt<unsigned> PHINodeFoldingThreshold(
92 "phi-node-folding-threshold", cl::Hidden, cl::init(2),
93 cl::desc(
94 "Control the amount of phi node folding to perform (default = 2)"));
95
96static cl::opt<bool> DupRet(
97 "simplifycfg-dup-ret", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
98 cl::desc("Duplicate return instructions into unconditional branches"));
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +000099
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +0000100static cl::opt<bool>
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000101 SinkCommon("simplifycfg-sink-common", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
102 cl::desc("Sink common instructions down to the end block"));
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +0000103
Alp Tokercb402912014-01-24 17:20:08 +0000104static cl::opt<bool> HoistCondStores(
105 "simplifycfg-hoist-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
106 cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores if an unconditional store precedes"));
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +0000107
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +0000108static cl::opt<bool> MergeCondStores(
109 "simplifycfg-merge-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
110 cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores even if an unconditional store does not "
111 "precede - hoist multiple conditional stores into a single "
112 "predicated store"));
113
114static cl::opt<bool> MergeCondStoresAggressively(
115 "simplifycfg-merge-cond-stores-aggressively", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
116 cl::desc("When merging conditional stores, do so even if the resultant "
117 "basic blocks are unlikely to be if-converted as a result"));
118
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000119static cl::opt<bool> SpeculateOneExpensiveInst(
120 "speculate-one-expensive-inst", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
121 cl::desc("Allow exactly one expensive instruction to be speculatively "
122 "executed"));
123
Sanjay Patel5264cc72016-01-27 19:22:45 +0000124static cl::opt<unsigned> MaxSpeculationDepth(
125 "max-speculation-depth", cl::Hidden, cl::init(10),
126 cl::desc("Limit maximum recursion depth when calculating costs of "
127 "speculatively executed instructions"));
128
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +0000129STATISTIC(NumBitMaps, "Number of switch instructions turned into bitmaps");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000130STATISTIC(NumLinearMaps,
131 "Number of switch instructions turned into linear mapping");
132STATISTIC(NumLookupTables,
133 "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables");
134STATISTIC(
135 NumLookupTablesHoles,
136 "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables (holes checked)");
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +0000137STATISTIC(NumTableCmpReuses, "Number of reused switch table lookup compares");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000138STATISTIC(NumSinkCommons,
139 "Number of common instructions sunk down to the end block");
Hans Wennborgcd3a11f2012-09-26 14:01:53 +0000140STATISTIC(NumSpeculations, "Number of speculative executed instructions");
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +0000141
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000142namespace {
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000143
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000144// The first field contains the value that the switch produces when a certain
145// case group is selected, and the second field is a vector containing the
146// cases composing the case group.
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +0000147using SwitchCaseResultVectorTy =
148 SmallVector<std::pair<Constant *, SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 4>>, 2>;
149
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000150// The first field contains the phi node that generates a result of the switch
151// and the second field contains the value generated for a certain case in the
152// switch for that PHI.
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +0000153using SwitchCaseResultsTy = SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4>;
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +0000154
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000155/// ValueEqualityComparisonCase - Represents a case of a switch.
156struct ValueEqualityComparisonCase {
157 ConstantInt *Value;
158 BasicBlock *Dest;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000159
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000160 ValueEqualityComparisonCase(ConstantInt *Value, BasicBlock *Dest)
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000161 : Value(Value), Dest(Dest) {}
162
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000163 bool operator<(ValueEqualityComparisonCase RHS) const {
164 // Comparing pointers is ok as we only rely on the order for uniquing.
165 return Value < RHS.Value;
166 }
Benjamin Kramerc5b06782012-10-14 11:15:42 +0000167
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000168 bool operator==(BasicBlock *RHSDest) const { return Dest == RHSDest; }
169};
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000170
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000171class SimplifyCFGOpt {
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000172 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000173 const DataLayout &DL;
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +0000174 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders;
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +0000175 const SimplifyCFGOptions &Options;
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +0000176 bool Resimplify;
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +0000177
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +0000178 Value *isValueEqualityComparison(Instruction *TI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000179 BasicBlock *GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +0000180 Instruction *TI, std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases);
181 bool SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(Instruction *TI,
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000182 BasicBlock *Pred,
183 IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +0000184 bool FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(Instruction *TI,
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000185 IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000186
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +0000187 bool SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Bill Wendlingd5d95b02012-02-06 21:16:41 +0000188 bool SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +0000189 bool SimplifySingleResume(ResumeInst *RI);
190 bool SimplifyCommonResume(ResumeInst *RI);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +0000191 bool SimplifyCleanupReturn(CleanupReturnInst *RI);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000192 bool SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI);
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000193 bool SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000194 bool SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000195 bool SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
196 bool SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000197
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +0000198 bool tryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(ICmpInst *ICI,
199 IRBuilder<> &Builder);
200
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000201public:
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000202 SimplifyCFGOpt(const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const DataLayout &DL,
Joerg Sonnenbergerfa736742017-03-26 06:44:08 +0000203 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders,
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +0000204 const SimplifyCFGOptions &Opts)
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +0000205 : TTI(TTI), DL(DL), LoopHeaders(LoopHeaders), Options(Opts) {}
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000206
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000207 bool run(BasicBlock *BB);
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +0000208 bool simplifyOnce(BasicBlock *BB);
209
210 // Helper to set Resimplify and return change indication.
211 bool requestResimplify() {
212 Resimplify = true;
213 return true;
214 }
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000215};
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000216
217} // end anonymous namespace
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000218
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000219/// Return true if it is safe to merge these two
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000220/// terminator instructions together.
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000221static bool
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +0000222SafeToMergeTerminators(Instruction *SI1, Instruction *SI2,
James Molloy21744682016-09-01 09:01:34 +0000223 SmallSetVector<BasicBlock *, 4> *FailBlocks = nullptr) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000224 if (SI1 == SI2)
225 return false; // Can't merge with self!
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000226
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000227 // It is not safe to merge these two switch instructions if they have a common
228 // successor, and if that successor has a PHI node, and if *that* PHI node has
229 // conflicting incoming values from the two switch blocks.
230 BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
231 BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
James Molloy3c1137c2016-08-31 13:32:28 +0000232
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000233 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
234 bool Fail = false;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000235 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(SI2BB))
236 if (SI1Succs.count(Succ))
237 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000238 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
239 if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) !=
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000240 PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB)) {
241 if (FailBlocks)
242 FailBlocks->insert(Succ);
243 Fail = true;
244 }
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000245 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000246
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000247 return !Fail;
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000248}
249
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000250/// Return true if it is safe and profitable to merge these two terminator
251/// instructions together, where SI1 is an unconditional branch. PhiNodes will
252/// store all PHI nodes in common successors.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000253static bool
254isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BranchInst *SI1, BranchInst *SI2,
255 Instruction *Cond,
256 SmallVectorImpl<PHINode *> &PhiNodes) {
257 if (SI1 == SI2)
258 return false; // Can't merge with self!
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000259 assert(SI1->isUnconditional() && SI2->isConditional());
260
261 // We fold the unconditional branch if we can easily update all PHI nodes in
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000262 // common successors:
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000263 // 1> We have a constant incoming value for the conditional branch;
264 // 2> We have "Cond" as the incoming value for the unconditional branch;
265 // 3> SI2->getCondition() and Cond have same operands.
266 CmpInst *Ci2 = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(SI2->getCondition());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000267 if (!Ci2)
268 return false;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000269 if (!(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(0) &&
270 Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(1)) &&
271 !(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(1) &&
272 Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(0)))
273 return false;
274
275 BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
276 BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000277 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000278 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(SI2BB))
279 if (SI1Succs.count(Succ))
280 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000281 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
282 if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) != Cond ||
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +0000283 !isa<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB)))
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000284 return false;
285 PhiNodes.push_back(PN);
286 }
287 return true;
288}
289
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000290/// Update PHI nodes in Succ to indicate that there will now be entries in it
291/// from the 'NewPred' block. The values that will be flowing into the PHI nodes
292/// will be the same as those coming in from ExistPred, an existing predecessor
293/// of Succ.
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000294static void AddPredecessorToBlock(BasicBlock *Succ, BasicBlock *NewPred,
295 BasicBlock *ExistPred) {
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +0000296 for (PHINode &PN : Succ->phis())
297 PN.addIncoming(PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(ExistPred), NewPred);
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000298}
299
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000300/// Compute an abstract "cost" of speculating the given instruction,
301/// which is assumed to be safe to speculate. TCC_Free means cheap,
302/// TCC_Basic means less cheap, and TCC_Expensive means prohibitively
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000303/// expensive.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000304static unsigned ComputeSpeculationCost(const User *I,
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000305 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000306 assert(isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000307 "Instruction is not safe to speculatively execute!");
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000308 return TTI.getUserCost(I);
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000309}
Sanjay Patelf9b77632015-09-15 15:24:42 +0000310
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000311/// If we have a merge point of an "if condition" as accepted above,
312/// return true if the specified value dominates the block. We
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000313/// don't handle the true generality of domination here, just a special case
314/// which works well enough for us.
315///
316/// If AggressiveInsts is non-null, and if V does not dominate BB, we check to
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000317/// see if V (which must be an instruction) and its recursive operands
318/// that do not dominate BB have a combined cost lower than CostRemaining and
319/// are non-trapping. If both are true, the instruction is inserted into the
320/// set and true is returned.
321///
322/// The cost for most non-trapping instructions is defined as 1 except for
323/// Select whose cost is 2.
324///
325/// After this function returns, CostRemaining is decreased by the cost of
326/// V plus its non-dominating operands. If that cost is greater than
327/// CostRemaining, false is returned and CostRemaining is undefined.
Chris Lattner45c35b12004-10-14 05:13:36 +0000328static bool DominatesMergePoint(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB,
Craig Topper029d1ef2018-10-04 23:40:31 +0000329 SmallPtrSetImpl<Instruction *> &AggressiveInsts,
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +0000330 unsigned &CostRemaining,
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000331 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
332 unsigned Depth = 0) {
Sanjay Patel5264cc72016-01-27 19:22:45 +0000333 // It is possible to hit a zero-cost cycle (phi/gep instructions for example),
334 // so limit the recursion depth.
335 // TODO: While this recursion limit does prevent pathological behavior, it
336 // would be better to track visited instructions to avoid cycles.
337 if (Depth == MaxSpeculationDepth)
338 return false;
339
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000340 Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
Chris Lattnerb8b11592006-10-20 00:42:07 +0000341 if (!I) {
342 // Non-instructions all dominate instructions, but not all constantexprs
343 // can be executed unconditionally.
344 if (ConstantExpr *C = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
345 if (C->canTrap())
346 return false;
347 return true;
348 }
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000349 BasicBlock *PBB = I->getParent();
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000350
Chris Lattner0ce80cd2005-02-27 06:18:25 +0000351 // We don't want to allow weird loops that might have the "if condition" in
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000352 // the bottom of this block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000353 if (PBB == BB)
354 return false;
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000355
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000356 // If this instruction is defined in a block that contains an unconditional
357 // branch to BB, then it must be in the 'conditional' part of the "if
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000358 // statement". If not, it definitely dominates the region.
359 BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PBB->getTerminator());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000360 if (!BI || BI->isConditional() || BI->getSuccessor(0) != BB)
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000361 return true;
Eli Friedmanb8f6a4f2009-07-17 04:28:42 +0000362
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000363 // If we have seen this instruction before, don't count it again.
Craig Topper029d1ef2018-10-04 23:40:31 +0000364 if (AggressiveInsts.count(I))
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000365 return true;
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000366
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000367 // Okay, it looks like the instruction IS in the "condition". Check to
368 // see if it's a cheap instruction to unconditionally compute, and if it
369 // only uses stuff defined outside of the condition. If so, hoist it out.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000370 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I))
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000371 return false;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000372
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000373 unsigned Cost = ComputeSpeculationCost(I, TTI);
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000374
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000375 // Allow exactly one instruction to be speculated regardless of its cost
376 // (as long as it is safe to do so).
377 // This is intended to flatten the CFG even if the instruction is a division
378 // or other expensive operation. The speculation of an expensive instruction
379 // is expected to be undone in CodeGenPrepare if the speculation has not
380 // enabled further IR optimizations.
381 if (Cost > CostRemaining &&
Craig Topper029d1ef2018-10-04 23:40:31 +0000382 (!SpeculateOneExpensiveInst || !AggressiveInsts.empty() || Depth > 0))
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000383 return false;
384
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000385 // Avoid unsigned wrap.
386 CostRemaining = (Cost > CostRemaining) ? 0 : CostRemaining - Cost;
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000387
388 // Okay, we can only really hoist these out if their operands do
389 // not take us over the cost threshold.
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000390 for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end(); i != e; ++i)
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000391 if (!DominatesMergePoint(*i, BB, AggressiveInsts, CostRemaining, TTI,
392 Depth + 1))
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000393 return false;
394 // Okay, it's safe to do this! Remember this instruction.
Craig Topper029d1ef2018-10-04 23:40:31 +0000395 AggressiveInsts.insert(I);
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000396 return true;
397}
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +0000398
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000399/// Extract ConstantInt from value, looking through IntToPtr
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000400/// and PointerNullValue. Return NULL if value is not a constant int.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000401static ConstantInt *GetConstantInt(Value *V, const DataLayout &DL) {
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000402 // Normal constant int.
403 ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(V);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000404 if (CI || !isa<Constant>(V) || !V->getType()->isPointerTy())
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000405 return CI;
406
407 // This is some kind of pointer constant. Turn it into a pointer-sized
408 // ConstantInt if possible.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000409 IntegerType *PtrTy = cast<IntegerType>(DL.getIntPtrType(V->getType()));
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000410
411 // Null pointer means 0, see SelectionDAGBuilder::getValue(const Value*).
412 if (isa<ConstantPointerNull>(V))
413 return ConstantInt::get(PtrTy, 0);
414
415 // IntToPtr const int.
416 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
417 if (CE->getOpcode() == Instruction::IntToPtr)
418 if (ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(CE->getOperand(0))) {
419 // The constant is very likely to have the right type already.
420 if (CI->getType() == PtrTy)
421 return CI;
422 else
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000423 return cast<ConstantInt>(
424 ConstantExpr::getIntegerCast(CI, PtrTy, /*isSigned=*/false));
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000425 }
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000426 return nullptr;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000427}
428
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000429namespace {
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000430
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000431/// Given a chain of or (||) or and (&&) comparison of a value against a
432/// constant, this will try to recover the information required for a switch
433/// structure.
434/// It will depth-first traverse the chain of comparison, seeking for patterns
435/// like %a == 12 or %a < 4 and combine them to produce a set of integer
436/// representing the different cases for the switch.
437/// Note that if the chain is composed of '||' it will build the set of elements
438/// that matches the comparisons (i.e. any of this value validate the chain)
439/// while for a chain of '&&' it will build the set elements that make the test
440/// fail.
441struct ConstantComparesGatherer {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000442 const DataLayout &DL;
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +0000443
444 /// Value found for the switch comparison
445 Value *CompValue = nullptr;
446
447 /// Extra clause to be checked before the switch
448 Value *Extra = nullptr;
449
450 /// Set of integers to match in switch
451 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 8> Vals;
452
453 /// Number of comparisons matched in the and/or chain
454 unsigned UsedICmps = 0;
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000455
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000456 /// Construct and compute the result for the comparison instruction Cond
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +0000457 ConstantComparesGatherer(Instruction *Cond, const DataLayout &DL) : DL(DL) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000458 gather(Cond);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000459 }
460
Aaron Ballmanf9a18972015-02-15 22:54:22 +0000461 ConstantComparesGatherer(const ConstantComparesGatherer &) = delete;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000462 ConstantComparesGatherer &
Aaron Ballmanf9a18972015-02-15 22:54:22 +0000463 operator=(const ConstantComparesGatherer &) = delete;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000464
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000465private:
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000466 /// Try to set the current value used for the comparison, it succeeds only if
467 /// it wasn't set before or if the new value is the same as the old one
468 bool setValueOnce(Value *NewVal) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000469 if (CompValue && CompValue != NewVal)
470 return false;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000471 CompValue = NewVal;
472 return (CompValue != nullptr);
473 }
474
475 /// Try to match Instruction "I" as a comparison against a constant and
476 /// populates the array Vals with the set of values that match (or do not
477 /// match depending on isEQ).
478 /// Return false on failure. On success, the Value the comparison matched
479 /// against is placed in CompValue.
480 /// If CompValue is already set, the function is expected to fail if a match
481 /// is found but the value compared to is different.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000482 bool matchInstruction(Instruction *I, bool isEQ) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000483 // If this is an icmp against a constant, handle this as one of the cases.
484 ICmpInst *ICI;
485 ConstantInt *C;
486 if (!((ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I)) &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000487 (C = GetConstantInt(I->getOperand(1), DL)))) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000488 return false;
489 }
490
491 Value *RHSVal;
Chuang-Yu Cheng5078f942016-06-17 00:04:39 +0000492 const APInt *RHSC;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000493
494 // Pattern match a special case
David Majnemerc761afd2016-01-27 02:43:28 +0000495 // (x & ~2^z) == y --> x == y || x == y|2^z
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000496 // This undoes a transformation done by instcombine to fuse 2 compares.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000497 if (ICI->getPredicate() == (isEQ ? ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ : ICmpInst::ICMP_NE)) {
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000498 // It's a little bit hard to see why the following transformations are
499 // correct. Here is a CVC3 program to verify them for 64-bit values:
500
501 /*
502 ONE : BITVECTOR(64) = BVZEROEXTEND(0bin1, 63);
503 x : BITVECTOR(64);
504 y : BITVECTOR(64);
505 z : BITVECTOR(64);
506 mask : BITVECTOR(64) = BVSHL(ONE, z);
507 QUERY( (y & ~mask = y) =>
508 ((x & ~mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y | mask)))
509 );
Chuang-Yu Cheng68f7f1c2016-06-24 01:59:00 +0000510 QUERY( (y | mask = y) =>
511 ((x | mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y & ~mask)))
512 );
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000513 */
514
515 // Please note that each pattern must be a dual implication (<--> or
516 // iff). One directional implication can create spurious matches. If the
517 // implication is only one-way, an unsatisfiable condition on the left
518 // side can imply a satisfiable condition on the right side. Dual
519 // implication ensures that satisfiable conditions are transformed to
520 // other satisfiable conditions and unsatisfiable conditions are
521 // transformed to other unsatisfiable conditions.
522
523 // Here is a concrete example of a unsatisfiable condition on the left
524 // implying a satisfiable condition on the right:
525 //
526 // mask = (1 << z)
527 // (x & ~mask) == y --> (x == y || x == (y | mask))
528 //
529 // Substituting y = 3, z = 0 yields:
530 // (x & -2) == 3 --> (x == 3 || x == 2)
531
532 // Pattern match a special case:
533 /*
534 QUERY( (y & ~mask = y) =>
535 ((x & ~mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y | mask)))
536 );
537 */
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000538 if (match(ICI->getOperand(0),
Chuang-Yu Cheng5078f942016-06-17 00:04:39 +0000539 m_And(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
540 APInt Mask = ~*RHSC;
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000541 if (Mask.isPowerOf2() && (C->getValue() & ~Mask) == C->getValue()) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000542 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000543 if (!setValueOnce(RHSVal))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000544 return false;
545
546 Vals.push_back(C);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000547 Vals.push_back(
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000548 ConstantInt::get(C->getContext(),
549 C->getValue() | Mask));
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000550 UsedICmps++;
551 return true;
552 }
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000553 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000554
Chuang-Yu Cheng68f7f1c2016-06-24 01:59:00 +0000555 // Pattern match a special case:
556 /*
557 QUERY( (y | mask = y) =>
558 ((x | mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y & ~mask)))
559 );
560 */
561 if (match(ICI->getOperand(0),
562 m_Or(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
563 APInt Mask = *RHSC;
564 if (Mask.isPowerOf2() && (C->getValue() | Mask) == C->getValue()) {
565 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
566 if (!setValueOnce(RHSVal))
567 return false;
568
569 Vals.push_back(C);
570 Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(C->getContext(),
571 C->getValue() & ~Mask));
572 UsedICmps++;
573 return true;
574 }
575 }
576
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000577 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000578 if (!setValueOnce(ICI->getOperand(0)))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000579 return false;
580
581 UsedICmps++;
582 Vals.push_back(C);
583 return ICI->getOperand(0);
584 }
585
586 // If we have "x ult 3", for example, then we can add 0,1,2 to the set.
Sanjoy Das7182d362015-03-18 00:41:24 +0000587 ConstantRange Span = ConstantRange::makeAllowedICmpRegion(
588 ICI->getPredicate(), C->getValue());
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000589
590 // Shift the range if the compare is fed by an add. This is the range
591 // compare idiom as emitted by instcombine.
592 Value *CandidateVal = I->getOperand(0);
Chuang-Yu Cheng5078f942016-06-17 00:04:39 +0000593 if (match(I->getOperand(0), m_Add(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
594 Span = Span.subtract(*RHSC);
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000595 CandidateVal = RHSVal;
596 }
597
598 // If this is an and/!= check, then we are looking to build the set of
599 // value that *don't* pass the and chain. I.e. to turn "x ugt 2" into
600 // x != 0 && x != 1.
601 if (!isEQ)
602 Span = Span.inverse();
603
604 // If there are a ton of values, we don't want to make a ginormous switch.
Craig Topper7e3e7af2017-05-07 22:22:11 +0000605 if (Span.isSizeLargerThan(8) || Span.isEmptySet()) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000606 return false;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000607 }
608
609 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000610 if (!setValueOnce(CandidateVal))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000611 return false;
612
613 // Add all values from the range to the set
614 for (APInt Tmp = Span.getLower(); Tmp != Span.getUpper(); ++Tmp)
615 Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(I->getContext(), Tmp));
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000616
617 UsedICmps++;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000618 return true;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000619 }
620
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000621 /// Given a potentially 'or'd or 'and'd together collection of icmp
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000622 /// eq/ne/lt/gt instructions that compare a value against a constant, extract
623 /// the value being compared, and stick the list constants into the Vals
624 /// vector.
625 /// One "Extra" case is allowed to differ from the other.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000626 void gather(Value *V) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000627 Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
628 bool isEQ = (I->getOpcode() == Instruction::Or);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000629
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000630 // Keep a stack (SmallVector for efficiency) for depth-first traversal
631 SmallVector<Value *, 8> DFT;
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000632 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 8> Visited;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000633
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000634 // Initialize
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000635 Visited.insert(V);
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000636 DFT.push_back(V);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000637
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000638 while (!DFT.empty()) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000639 V = DFT.pop_back_val();
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000640
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000641 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V)) {
642 // If it is a || (or && depending on isEQ), process the operands.
643 if (I->getOpcode() == (isEQ ? Instruction::Or : Instruction::And)) {
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000644 if (Visited.insert(I->getOperand(1)).second)
645 DFT.push_back(I->getOperand(1));
646 if (Visited.insert(I->getOperand(0)).second)
647 DFT.push_back(I->getOperand(0));
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000648 continue;
649 }
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000650
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000651 // Try to match the current instruction
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000652 if (matchInstruction(I, isEQ))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000653 // Match succeed, continue the loop
654 continue;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000655 }
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000656
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000657 // One element of the sequence of || (or &&) could not be match as a
658 // comparison against the same value as the others.
659 // We allow only one "Extra" case to be checked before the switch
660 if (!Extra) {
661 Extra = V;
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000662 continue;
663 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000664 // Failed to parse a proper sequence, abort now
665 CompValue = nullptr;
666 break;
Chris Lattner5a177e62010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000667 }
Anton Korobeynikov1bfd1212008-02-20 11:26:25 +0000668 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000669};
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000670
671} // end anonymous namespace
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +0000672
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +0000673static void EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(Instruction *TI) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000674 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000675 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
676 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(SI->getCondition());
677 } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
678 if (BI->isConditional())
679 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +0000680 } else if (IndirectBrInst *IBI = dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(TI)) {
681 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(IBI->getAddress());
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000682 }
683
684 TI->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000685 if (Cond)
686 RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(Cond);
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000687}
688
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000689/// Return true if the specified terminator checks
Chris Lattner8e84c122008-11-27 23:25:44 +0000690/// to see if a value is equal to constant integer value.
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +0000691Value *SimplifyCFGOpt::isValueEqualityComparison(Instruction *TI) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000692 Value *CV = nullptr;
Chris Lattnera64923a2004-03-16 19:45:22 +0000693 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
694 // Do not permit merging of large switch instructions into their
695 // predecessors unless there is only one predecessor.
Vedant Kumare0b5f862018-05-10 23:01:54 +0000696 if (SI->getNumSuccessors() * pred_size(SI->getParent()) <= 128)
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000697 CV = SI->getCondition();
698 } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI))
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000699 if (BI->isConditional() && BI->getCondition()->hasOneUse())
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000700 if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition())) {
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000701 if (ICI->isEquality() && GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1), DL))
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000702 CV = ICI->getOperand(0);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000703 }
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000704
705 // Unwrap any lossless ptrtoint cast.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000706 if (CV) {
Matt Arsenaultfa646592013-10-21 18:55:08 +0000707 if (PtrToIntInst *PTII = dyn_cast<PtrToIntInst>(CV)) {
708 Value *Ptr = PTII->getPointerOperand();
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000709 if (PTII->getType() == DL.getIntPtrType(Ptr->getType()))
Matt Arsenaultfa646592013-10-21 18:55:08 +0000710 CV = Ptr;
711 }
712 }
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000713 return CV;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000714}
715
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000716/// Given a value comparison instruction,
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000717/// decode all of the 'cases' that it represents and return the 'default' block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000718BasicBlock *SimplifyCFGOpt::GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +0000719 Instruction *TI, std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases) {
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000720 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000721 Cases.reserve(SI->getNumCases());
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +0000722 for (auto Case : SI->cases())
723 Cases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(Case.getCaseValue(),
724 Case.getCaseSuccessor()));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000725 return SI->getDefaultDest();
726 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000727
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000728 BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(TI);
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000729 ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000730 BasicBlock *Succ = BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_NE);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000731 Cases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(
732 GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1), DL), Succ));
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000733 return BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000734}
735
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000736/// Given a vector of bb/value pairs, remove any entries
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000737/// in the list that match the specified block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000738static void
739EliminateBlockCases(BasicBlock *BB,
740 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases) {
Benjamin Kramerc5b06782012-10-14 11:15:42 +0000741 Cases.erase(std::remove(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), BB), Cases.end());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000742}
743
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000744/// Return true if there are any keys in C1 that exist in C2 as well.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000745static bool ValuesOverlap(std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &C1,
746 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &C2) {
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000747 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> *V1 = &C1, *V2 = &C2;
748
749 // Make V1 be smaller than V2.
750 if (V1->size() > V2->size())
751 std::swap(V1, V2);
752
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000753 if (V1->empty())
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000754 return false;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000755 if (V1->size() == 1) {
756 // Just scan V2.
757 ConstantInt *TheVal = (*V1)[0].Value;
758 for (unsigned i = 0, e = V2->size(); i != e; ++i)
759 if (TheVal == (*V2)[i].Value)
760 return true;
761 }
762
763 // Otherwise, just sort both lists and compare element by element.
764 array_pod_sort(V1->begin(), V1->end());
765 array_pod_sort(V2->begin(), V2->end());
766 unsigned i1 = 0, i2 = 0, e1 = V1->size(), e2 = V2->size();
767 while (i1 != e1 && i2 != e2) {
768 if ((*V1)[i1].Value == (*V2)[i2].Value)
769 return true;
770 if ((*V1)[i1].Value < (*V2)[i2].Value)
771 ++i1;
772 else
773 ++i2;
774 }
775 return false;
776}
777
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +0000778// Set branch weights on SwitchInst. This sets the metadata if there is at
779// least one non-zero weight.
780static void setBranchWeights(SwitchInst *SI, ArrayRef<uint32_t> Weights) {
781 // Check that there is at least one non-zero weight. Otherwise, pass
782 // nullptr to setMetadata which will erase the existing metadata.
783 MDNode *N = nullptr;
784 if (llvm::any_of(Weights, [](uint32_t W) { return W != 0; }))
785 N = MDBuilder(SI->getParent()->getContext()).createBranchWeights(Weights);
786 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, N);
787}
788
789// Similar to the above, but for branch and select instructions that take
790// exactly 2 weights.
791static void setBranchWeights(Instruction *I, uint32_t TrueWeight,
792 uint32_t FalseWeight) {
793 assert(isa<BranchInst>(I) || isa<SelectInst>(I));
794 // Check that there is at least one non-zero weight. Otherwise, pass
795 // nullptr to setMetadata which will erase the existing metadata.
796 MDNode *N = nullptr;
797 if (TrueWeight || FalseWeight)
798 N = MDBuilder(I->getParent()->getContext())
799 .createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight);
800 I->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, N);
801}
802
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000803/// If TI is known to be a terminator instruction and its block is known to
804/// only have a single predecessor block, check to see if that predecessor is
805/// also a value comparison with the same value, and if that comparison
806/// determines the outcome of this comparison. If so, simplify TI. This does a
807/// very limited form of jump threading.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000808bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +0000809 Instruction *TI, BasicBlock *Pred, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000810 Value *PredVal = isValueEqualityComparison(Pred->getTerminator());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000811 if (!PredVal)
812 return false; // Not a value comparison in predecessor.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000813
814 Value *ThisVal = isValueEqualityComparison(TI);
815 assert(ThisVal && "This isn't a value comparison!!");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000816 if (ThisVal != PredVal)
817 return false; // Different predicates.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000818
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000819 // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
820 // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
821
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000822 // Find out information about when control will move from Pred to TI's block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000823 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000824 BasicBlock *PredDef =
825 GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(Pred->getTerminator(), PredCases);
826 EliminateBlockCases(PredDef, PredCases); // Remove default from cases.
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000827
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000828 // Find information about how control leaves this block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000829 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> ThisCases;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000830 BasicBlock *ThisDef = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, ThisCases);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000831 EliminateBlockCases(ThisDef, ThisCases); // Remove default from cases.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000832
833 // If TI's block is the default block from Pred's comparison, potentially
834 // simplify TI based on this knowledge.
835 if (PredDef == TI->getParent()) {
836 // If we are here, we know that the value is none of those cases listed in
837 // PredCases. If there are any cases in ThisCases that are in PredCases, we
838 // can simplify TI.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000839 if (!ValuesOverlap(PredCases, ThisCases))
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000840 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000841
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000842 if (isa<BranchInst>(TI)) {
843 // Okay, one of the successors of this condbr is dead. Convert it to a
844 // uncond br.
845 assert(ThisCases.size() == 1 && "Branch can only have one case!");
846 // Insert the new branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000847 Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(ThisDef);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000848 (void)NI;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000849
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000850 // Remove PHI node entries for the dead edge.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000851 ThisCases[0].Dest->removePredecessor(TI->getParent());
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000852
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +0000853 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
854 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI
855 << "\n");
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000856
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +0000857 EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(TI);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000858 return true;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000859 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000860
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000861 SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(TI);
862 // Okay, TI has cases that are statically dead, prune them away.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000863 SmallPtrSet<Constant *, 16> DeadCases;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000864 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
865 DeadCases.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000866
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +0000867 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
868 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI);
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000869
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000870 // Collect branch weights into a vector.
871 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> Weights;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000872 MDNode *MD = SI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000873 bool HasWeight = MD && (MD->getNumOperands() == 2 + SI->getNumCases());
874 if (HasWeight)
875 for (unsigned MD_i = 1, MD_e = MD->getNumOperands(); MD_i < MD_e;
876 ++MD_i) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5bf8fef2014-12-09 18:38:53 +0000877 ConstantInt *CI = mdconst::extract<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(MD_i));
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000878 Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
879 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000880 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_end(), e = SI->case_begin(); i != e;) {
881 --i;
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +0000882 if (DeadCases.count(i->getCaseValue())) {
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000883 if (HasWeight) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +0000884 std::swap(Weights[i->getCaseIndex() + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000885 Weights.pop_back();
886 }
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +0000887 i->getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(TI->getParent());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000888 SI->removeCase(i);
889 }
890 }
Manman Ren97c18762012-10-11 22:28:34 +0000891 if (HasWeight && Weights.size() >= 2)
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +0000892 setBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000893
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +0000894 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Leaving: " << *TI << "\n");
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000895 return true;
896 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000897
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000898 // Otherwise, TI's block must correspond to some matched value. Find out
899 // which value (or set of values) this is.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000900 ConstantInt *TIV = nullptr;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000901 BasicBlock *TIBB = TI->getParent();
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000902 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
903 if (PredCases[i].Dest == TIBB) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000904 if (TIV)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000905 return false; // Cannot handle multiple values coming to this block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000906 TIV = PredCases[i].Value;
907 }
908 assert(TIV && "No edge from pred to succ?");
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000909
910 // Okay, we found the one constant that our value can be if we get into TI's
911 // BB. Find out which successor will unconditionally be branched to.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000912 BasicBlock *TheRealDest = nullptr;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000913 for (unsigned i = 0, e = ThisCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
914 if (ThisCases[i].Value == TIV) {
915 TheRealDest = ThisCases[i].Dest;
916 break;
917 }
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000918
919 // If not handled by any explicit cases, it is handled by the default case.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000920 if (!TheRealDest)
921 TheRealDest = ThisDef;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000922
923 // Remove PHI node entries for dead edges.
924 BasicBlock *CheckEdge = TheRealDest;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000925 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(TIBB))
926 if (Succ != CheckEdge)
927 Succ->removePredecessor(TIBB);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000928 else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000929 CheckEdge = nullptr;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000930
931 // Insert the new branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000932 Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(TheRealDest);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000933 (void)NI;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000934
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +0000935 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
936 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI
937 << "\n");
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000938
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +0000939 EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(TI);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000940 return true;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000941}
942
Dale Johannesen7f99d222009-03-12 21:01:11 +0000943namespace {
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000944
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000945/// This class implements a stable ordering of constant
946/// integers that does not depend on their address. This is important for
947/// applications that sort ConstantInt's to ensure uniqueness.
948struct ConstantIntOrdering {
949 bool operator()(const ConstantInt *LHS, const ConstantInt *RHS) const {
950 return LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue());
951 }
952};
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000953
954} // end anonymous namespace
Dale Johannesen5a41b2d2009-03-12 01:00:26 +0000955
Benjamin Kramer8817cca2013-09-22 14:09:50 +0000956static int ConstantIntSortPredicate(ConstantInt *const *P1,
957 ConstantInt *const *P2) {
958 const ConstantInt *LHS = *P1;
959 const ConstantInt *RHS = *P2;
Benjamin Kramer7d537ae2016-02-20 10:40:42 +0000960 if (LHS == RHS)
Chris Lattnere893e262010-12-15 04:52:41 +0000961 return 0;
Benjamin Kramer7d537ae2016-02-20 10:40:42 +0000962 return LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue()) ? 1 : -1;
Chris Lattner7c8e6042010-12-13 02:00:58 +0000963}
964
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000965static inline bool HasBranchWeights(const Instruction *I) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000966 MDNode *ProfMD = I->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000967 if (ProfMD && ProfMD->getOperand(0))
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000968 if (MDString *MDS = dyn_cast<MDString>(ProfMD->getOperand(0)))
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000969 return MDS->getString().equals("branch_weights");
970
971 return false;
972}
973
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +0000974/// Get Weights of a given terminator, the default weight is at the front
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000975/// of the vector. If TI is a conditional eq, we need to swap the branch-weight
976/// metadata.
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +0000977static void GetBranchWeights(Instruction *TI,
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000978 SmallVectorImpl<uint64_t> &Weights) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000979 MDNode *MD = TI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000980 assert(MD);
981 for (unsigned i = 1, e = MD->getNumOperands(); i < e; ++i) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5bf8fef2014-12-09 18:38:53 +0000982 ConstantInt *CI = mdconst::extract<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(i));
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000983 Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000984 }
985
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000986 // If TI is a conditional eq, the default case is the false case,
987 // and the corresponding branch-weight data is at index 2. We swap the
988 // default weight to be the first entry.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000989 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000990 assert(Weights.size() == 2);
991 ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
992 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
993 std::swap(Weights.front(), Weights.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000994 }
995}
996
Sanjay Patel84a0bf62016-05-06 17:51:37 +0000997/// Keep halving the weights until all can fit in uint32_t.
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000998static void FitWeights(MutableArrayRef<uint64_t> Weights) {
Benjamin Kramer79da9412014-03-09 14:42:55 +0000999 uint64_t Max = *std::max_element(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
1000 if (Max > UINT_MAX) {
1001 unsigned Offset = 32 - countLeadingZeros(Max);
1002 for (uint64_t &I : Weights)
1003 I >>= Offset;
Manman Renf1cb16e2014-01-27 23:39:03 +00001004 }
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001005}
1006
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001007/// The specified terminator is a value equality comparison instruction
1008/// (either a switch or a branch on "X == c").
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +00001009/// See if any of the predecessors of the terminator block are value comparisons
1010/// on the same value. If so, and if safe to do so, fold them together.
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00001011bool SimplifyCFGOpt::FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(Instruction *TI,
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00001012 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001013 BasicBlock *BB = TI->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001014 Value *CV = isValueEqualityComparison(TI); // CondVal
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001015 assert(CV && "Not a comparison?");
1016 bool Changed = false;
1017
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001018 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 16> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001019 while (!Preds.empty()) {
Dan Gohman9a6fef02009-05-06 17:22:41 +00001020 BasicBlock *Pred = Preds.pop_back_val();
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001021
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001022 // See if the predecessor is a comparison with the same value.
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00001023 Instruction *PTI = Pred->getTerminator();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001024 Value *PCV = isValueEqualityComparison(PTI); // PredCondVal
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001025
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +00001026 if (PCV == CV && TI != PTI) {
James Molloy21744682016-09-01 09:01:34 +00001027 SmallSetVector<BasicBlock*, 4> FailBlocks;
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +00001028 if (!SafeToMergeTerminators(TI, PTI, &FailBlocks)) {
1029 for (auto *Succ : FailBlocks) {
Benjamin Kramer46f5e2c2017-03-24 14:15:35 +00001030 if (!SplitBlockPredecessors(Succ, TI->getParent(), ".fold.split"))
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +00001031 return false;
1032 }
1033 }
1034
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001035 // Figure out which 'cases' to copy from SI to PSI.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001036 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> BBCases;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001037 BasicBlock *BBDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, BBCases);
1038
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001039 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001040 BasicBlock *PredDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(PTI, PredCases);
1041
1042 // Based on whether the default edge from PTI goes to BB or not, fill in
1043 // PredCases and PredDefault with the new switch cases we would like to
1044 // build.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001045 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> NewSuccessors;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001046
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001047 // Update the branch weight metadata along the way
1048 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001049 bool PredHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(PTI);
1050 bool SuccHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(TI);
1051
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +00001052 if (PredHasWeights) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001053 GetBranchWeights(PTI, Weights);
Andrew Trick7656f6d2012-11-15 18:40:31 +00001054 // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +00001055 if (Weights.size() != 1 + PredCases.size())
1056 PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
1057 } else if (SuccHasWeights)
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001058 // If there are no predecessor weights but there are successor weights,
1059 // populate Weights with 1, which will later be scaled to the sum of
1060 // successor's weights
1061 Weights.assign(1 + PredCases.size(), 1);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001062
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001063 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> SuccWeights;
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +00001064 if (SuccHasWeights) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001065 GetBranchWeights(TI, SuccWeights);
Andrew Trick7656f6d2012-11-15 18:40:31 +00001066 // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +00001067 if (SuccWeights.size() != 1 + BBCases.size())
1068 PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
1069 } else if (PredHasWeights)
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001070 SuccWeights.assign(1 + BBCases.size(), 1);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001071
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001072 if (PredDefault == BB) {
1073 // If this is the default destination from PTI, only the edges in TI
1074 // that don't occur in PTI, or that branch to BB will be activated.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001075 std::set<ConstantInt *, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001076 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1077 if (PredCases[i].Dest != BB)
1078 PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
1079 else {
1080 // The default destination is BB, we don't need explicit targets.
1081 std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001082
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001083 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
1084 // Increase weight for the default case.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001085 Weights[0] += Weights[i + 1];
1086 std::swap(Weights[i + 1], Weights.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001087 Weights.pop_back();
1088 }
1089
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001090 PredCases.pop_back();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001091 --i;
1092 --e;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001093 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001094
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001095 // Reconstruct the new switch statement we will be building.
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001096 if (PredDefault != BBDefault) {
1097 PredDefault->removePredecessor(Pred);
1098 PredDefault = BBDefault;
1099 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault);
1100 }
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001101
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001102 unsigned CasesFromPred = Weights.size();
1103 uint64_t ValidTotalSuccWeight = 0;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001104 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1105 if (!PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value) &&
1106 BBCases[i].Dest != BBDefault) {
1107 PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
1108 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest);
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001109 if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
1110 // The default weight is at index 0, so weight for the ith case
1111 // should be at index i+1. Scale the cases from successor by
1112 // PredDefaultWeight (Weights[0]).
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001113 Weights.push_back(Weights[0] * SuccWeights[i + 1]);
1114 ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[i + 1];
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001115 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001116 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001117
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001118 if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
1119 ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[0];
1120 // Scale the cases from predecessor by ValidTotalSuccWeight.
1121 for (unsigned i = 1; i < CasesFromPred; ++i)
1122 Weights[i] *= ValidTotalSuccWeight;
1123 // Scale the default weight by SuccDefaultWeight (SuccWeights[0]).
1124 Weights[0] *= SuccWeights[0];
1125 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001126 } else {
1127 // If this is not the default destination from PSI, only the edges
1128 // in SI that occur in PSI with a destination of BB will be
1129 // activated.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001130 std::set<ConstantInt *, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
1131 std::map<ConstantInt *, uint64_t> WeightsForHandled;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001132 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1133 if (PredCases[i].Dest == BB) {
1134 PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +00001135
1136 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001137 WeightsForHandled[PredCases[i].Value] = Weights[i + 1];
1138 std::swap(Weights[i + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +00001139 Weights.pop_back();
1140 }
1141
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001142 std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
1143 PredCases.pop_back();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001144 --i;
1145 --e;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001146 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001147
1148 // Okay, now we know which constants were sent to BB from the
1149 // predecessor. Figure out where they will all go now.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001150 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1151 if (PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value)) {
1152 // If this is one we are capable of getting...
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +00001153 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
1154 Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[BBCases[i].Value]);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001155 PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
1156 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001157 PTIHandled.erase(
1158 BBCases[i].Value); // This constant is taken care of
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001159 }
1160
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001161 // If there are any constants vectored to BB that TI doesn't handle,
1162 // they must go to the default destination of TI.
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00001163 for (ConstantInt *I : PTIHandled) {
Andrew Trick90f50292012-11-15 18:40:29 +00001164 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00001165 Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[I]);
1166 PredCases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(I, BBDefault));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001167 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001168 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001169 }
1170
1171 // Okay, at this point, we know which new successor Pred will get. Make
1172 // sure we update the number of entries in the PHI nodes for these
1173 // successors.
Sanjay Patelf4b34b72015-09-10 16:25:38 +00001174 for (BasicBlock *NewSuccessor : NewSuccessors)
1175 AddPredecessorToBlock(NewSuccessor, Pred, BB);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001176
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00001177 Builder.SetInsertPoint(PTI);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00001178 // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
Duncan Sands19d0b472010-02-16 11:11:14 +00001179 if (CV->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001180 CV = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(CV, DL.getIntPtrType(CV->getType()),
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00001181 "magicptr");
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00001182 }
1183
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001184 // Now that the successors are updated, create the new Switch instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001185 SwitchInst *NewSI =
1186 Builder.CreateSwitch(CV, PredDefault, PredCases.size());
Devang Patelb849cd52011-05-17 23:29:05 +00001187 NewSI->setDebugLoc(PTI->getDebugLoc());
Sanjay Patel5e7bd912015-09-10 16:15:21 +00001188 for (ValueEqualityComparisonCase &V : PredCases)
1189 NewSI->addCase(V.Value, V.Dest);
Chris Lattner3215bb62005-01-01 16:02:12 +00001190
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001191 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
1192 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
1193 FitWeights(Weights);
1194
1195 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
1196
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00001197 setBranchWeights(NewSI, MDWeights);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001198 }
1199
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00001200 EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(PTI);
Chris Lattner3215bb62005-01-01 16:02:12 +00001201
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001202 // Okay, last check. If BB is still a successor of PSI, then we must
1203 // have an infinite loop case. If so, add an infinitely looping block
1204 // to handle the case to preserve the behavior of the code.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001205 BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock = nullptr;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001206 for (unsigned i = 0, e = NewSI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
1207 if (NewSI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001208 if (!InfLoopBlock) {
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00001209 // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001210 // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001211 InfLoopBlock = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "infloop",
1212 BB->getParent());
Gabor Greife9ecc682008-04-06 20:25:17 +00001213 BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001214 }
1215 NewSI->setSuccessor(i, InfLoopBlock);
1216 }
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001217
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001218 Changed = true;
1219 }
1220 }
1221 return Changed;
1222}
1223
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001224// If we would need to insert a select that uses the value of this invoke
1225// (comments in HoistThenElseCodeToIf explain why we would need to do this), we
1226// can't hoist the invoke, as there is nowhere to put the select in this case.
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001227static bool isSafeToHoistInvoke(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2,
1228 Instruction *I1, Instruction *I2) {
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001229 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00001230 for (const PHINode &PN : Succ->phis()) {
1231 Value *BB1V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1232 Value *BB2V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001233 if (BB1V != BB2V && (BB1V == I1 || BB2V == I2)) {
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001234 return false;
1235 }
1236 }
1237 }
1238 return true;
1239}
1240
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001241static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I);
1242
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001243/// Given a conditional branch that goes to BB1 and BB2, hoist any common code
1244/// in the two blocks up into the branch block. The caller of this function
1245/// guarantees that BI's block dominates BB1 and BB2.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001246static bool HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BranchInst *BI,
Chad Rosier54390052015-02-23 19:15:16 +00001247 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001248 // This does very trivial matching, with limited scanning, to find identical
1249 // instructions in the two blocks. In particular, we don't want to get into
1250 // O(M*N) situations here where M and N are the sizes of BB1 and BB2. As
1251 // such, we currently just scan for obviously identical instructions in an
1252 // identical order.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001253 BasicBlock *BB1 = BI->getSuccessor(0); // The true destination.
1254 BasicBlock *BB2 = BI->getSuccessor(1); // The false destination
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001255
Devang Patelf10e2872009-02-04 00:03:08 +00001256 BasicBlock::iterator BB1_Itr = BB1->begin();
1257 BasicBlock::iterator BB2_Itr = BB2->begin();
1258
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001259 Instruction *I1 = &*BB1_Itr++, *I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Ulrich Weigand019dd232018-03-09 22:00:10 +00001260 // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1261 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1262 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1263 if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1264 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
1265 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
1266 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
1267 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
1268 }
1269 if (isa<PHINode>(I1) || !I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2) ||
1270 (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2)))
1271 return false;
1272
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001273 BasicBlock *BIParent = BI->getParent();
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001274
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001275 bool Changed = false;
Ulrich Weigand019dd232018-03-09 22:00:10 +00001276 do {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001277 // If we are hoisting the terminator instruction, don't move one (making a
1278 // broken BB), instead clone it, and remove BI.
Chandler Carruth9ae926b2018-08-26 09:51:22 +00001279 if (I1->isTerminator())
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001280 goto HoistTerminator;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001281
Davide Italiano9f074fe2017-12-31 16:47:16 +00001282 // If we're going to hoist a call, make sure that the two instructions we're
1283 // commoning/hoisting are both marked with musttail, or neither of them is
1284 // marked as such. Otherwise, we might end up in a situation where we hoist
1285 // from a block where the terminator is a `ret` to a block where the terminator
1286 // is a `br`, and `musttail` calls expect to be followed by a return.
1287 auto *C1 = dyn_cast<CallInst>(I1);
1288 auto *C2 = dyn_cast<CallInst>(I2);
1289 if (C1 && C2)
1290 if (C1->isMustTailCall() != C2->isMustTailCall())
Davide Italiano86b79492017-12-31 16:54:03 +00001291 return Changed;
Davide Italiano9f074fe2017-12-31 16:47:16 +00001292
Chad Rosier54390052015-02-23 19:15:16 +00001293 if (!TTI.isProfitableToHoist(I1) || !TTI.isProfitableToHoist(I2))
1294 return Changed;
1295
Ulrich Weigandf4ceef82018-03-15 12:28:48 +00001296 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1) || isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2)) {
1297 assert (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1) && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2));
1298 // The debug location is an integral part of a debug info intrinsic
1299 // and can't be separated from it or replaced. Instead of attempting
1300 // to merge locations, simply hoist both copies of the intrinsic.
1301 BIParent->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(),
1302 BB1->getInstList(), I1);
1303 BIParent->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(),
1304 BB2->getInstList(), I2);
1305 Changed = true;
1306 } else {
1307 // For a normal instruction, we just move one to right before the branch,
1308 // then replace all uses of the other with the first. Finally, we remove
1309 // the now redundant second instruction.
1310 BIParent->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(),
1311 BB1->getInstList(), I1);
1312 if (!I2->use_empty())
1313 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(I1);
1314 I1->andIRFlags(I2);
1315 unsigned KnownIDs[] = {LLVMContext::MD_tbaa,
1316 LLVMContext::MD_range,
1317 LLVMContext::MD_fpmath,
1318 LLVMContext::MD_invariant_load,
1319 LLVMContext::MD_nonnull,
1320 LLVMContext::MD_invariant_group,
1321 LLVMContext::MD_align,
1322 LLVMContext::MD_dereferenceable,
1323 LLVMContext::MD_dereferenceable_or_null,
1324 LLVMContext::MD_mem_parallel_loop_access};
Florian Hahn406f1ff2018-08-24 11:40:04 +00001325 combineMetadata(I1, I2, KnownIDs, true);
Dehao Chen87823f82016-09-08 21:53:33 +00001326
Ulrich Weigandf4ceef82018-03-15 12:28:48 +00001327 // I1 and I2 are being combined into a single instruction. Its debug
1328 // location is the merged locations of the original instructions.
1329 I1->applyMergedLocation(I1->getDebugLoc(), I2->getDebugLoc());
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001330
Ulrich Weigandf4ceef82018-03-15 12:28:48 +00001331 I2->eraseFromParent();
1332 Changed = true;
1333 }
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001334
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001335 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
1336 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Ulrich Weigand019dd232018-03-09 22:00:10 +00001337 // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1338 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1339 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1340 if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1341 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
1342 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
1343 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
1344 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
1345 }
1346 } while (I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2));
1347
1348 return true;
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001349
1350HoistTerminator:
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001351 // It may not be possible to hoist an invoke.
1352 if (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001353 return Changed;
1354
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001355 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00001356 for (PHINode &PN : Succ->phis()) {
1357 Value *BB1V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1358 Value *BB2V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001359 if (BB1V == BB2V)
1360 continue;
1361
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001362 // Check for passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined here because we would rather
1363 // eliminate undefined control flow then converting it to a select.
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00001364 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB1V, &PN) ||
1365 passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB2V, &PN))
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001366 return Changed;
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001367
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001368 if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB1V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB1V))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001369 return Changed;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001370 if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB2V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB2V))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001371 return Changed;
1372 }
1373 }
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001374
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001375 // Okay, it is safe to hoist the terminator.
Nick Lewycky42fb7452009-09-27 07:38:41 +00001376 Instruction *NT = I1->clone();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001377 BIParent->getInstList().insert(BI->getIterator(), NT);
Benjamin Kramerccce8ba2010-01-05 13:12:22 +00001378 if (!NT->getType()->isVoidTy()) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001379 I1->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
1380 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
Chris Lattner8dd4cae2007-02-11 01:37:51 +00001381 NT->takeName(I1);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001382 }
1383
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00001384 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(NT);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001385 // Hoisting one of the terminators from our successor is a great thing.
1386 // Unfortunately, the successors of the if/else blocks may have PHI nodes in
1387 // them. If they do, all PHI entries for BB1/BB2 must agree for all PHI
1388 // nodes, so we insert select instruction to compute the final result.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001389 std::map<std::pair<Value *, Value *>, SelectInst *> InsertedSelects;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001390 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00001391 for (PHINode &PN : Succ->phis()) {
1392 Value *BB1V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1393 Value *BB2V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001394 if (BB1V == BB2V)
1395 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001396
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001397 // These values do not agree. Insert a select instruction before NT
1398 // that determines the right value.
1399 SelectInst *&SI = InsertedSelects[std::make_pair(BB1V, BB2V)];
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001400 if (!SI)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001401 SI = cast<SelectInst>(
1402 Builder.CreateSelect(BI->getCondition(), BB1V, BB2V,
1403 BB1V->getName() + "." + BB2V->getName(), BI));
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00001404
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001405 // Make the PHI node use the select for all incoming values for BB1/BB2
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00001406 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN.getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
1407 if (PN.getIncomingBlock(i) == BB1 || PN.getIncomingBlock(i) == BB2)
1408 PN.setIncomingValue(i, SI);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001409 }
1410 }
1411
1412 // Update any PHI nodes in our new successors.
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001413 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1))
1414 AddPredecessorToBlock(Succ, BIParent, BB1);
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001415
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00001416 EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001417 return true;
1418}
1419
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001420// All instructions in Insts belong to different blocks that all unconditionally
1421// branch to a common successor. Analyze each instruction and return true if it
1422// would be possible to sink them into their successor, creating one common
1423// instruction instead. For every value that would be required to be provided by
1424// PHI node (because an operand varies in each input block), add to PHIOperands.
1425static bool canSinkInstructions(
1426 ArrayRef<Instruction *> Insts,
1427 DenseMap<Instruction *, SmallVector<Value *, 4>> &PHIOperands) {
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001428 // Prune out obviously bad instructions to move. Any non-store instruction
1429 // must have exactly one use, and we check later that use is by a single,
1430 // common PHI instruction in the successor.
1431 for (auto *I : Insts) {
1432 // These instructions may change or break semantics if moved.
1433 if (isa<PHINode>(I) || I->isEHPad() || isa<AllocaInst>(I) ||
1434 I->getType()->isTokenTy())
1435 return false;
Akira Hatanaka4ec7b202017-01-25 06:21:51 +00001436
1437 // Conservatively return false if I is an inline-asm instruction. Sinking
1438 // and merging inline-asm instructions can potentially create arguments
1439 // that cannot satisfy the inline-asm constraints.
1440 if (const auto *C = dyn_cast<CallInst>(I))
1441 if (C->isInlineAsm())
1442 return false;
1443
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001444 // Everything must have only one use too, apart from stores which
1445 // have no uses.
1446 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I) && !I->hasOneUse())
1447 return false;
1448 }
1449
1450 const Instruction *I0 = Insts.front();
1451 for (auto *I : Insts)
1452 if (!I->isSameOperationAs(I0))
1453 return false;
1454
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001455 // All instructions in Insts are known to be the same opcode. If they aren't
1456 // stores, check the only user of each is a PHI or in the same block as the
1457 // instruction, because if a user is in the same block as an instruction
1458 // we're contemplating sinking, it must already be determined to be sinkable.
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001459 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I0)) {
1460 auto *PNUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(*I0->user_begin());
James Molloy6c009c12016-09-07 09:01:22 +00001461 auto *Succ = I0->getParent()->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
Eric Liu8c7d28b2017-03-15 15:29:42 +00001462 if (!all_of(Insts, [&PNUse,&Succ](const Instruction *I) -> bool {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001463 auto *U = cast<Instruction>(*I->user_begin());
Eric Liu8c7d28b2017-03-15 15:29:42 +00001464 return (PNUse &&
1465 PNUse->getParent() == Succ &&
1466 PNUse->getIncomingValueForBlock(I->getParent()) == I) ||
1467 U->getParent() == I->getParent();
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001468 }))
1469 return false;
1470 }
1471
Aditya Kumar24f6ad512017-03-16 14:09:18 +00001472 // Because SROA can't handle speculating stores of selects, try not
1473 // to sink loads or stores of allocas when we'd have to create a PHI for
1474 // the address operand. Also, because it is likely that loads or stores
1475 // of allocas will disappear when Mem2Reg/SROA is run, don't sink them.
1476 // This can cause code churn which can have unintended consequences down
1477 // the line - see https://llvm.org/bugs/show_bug.cgi?id=30244.
1478 // FIXME: This is a workaround for a deficiency in SROA - see
1479 // https://llvm.org/bugs/show_bug.cgi?id=30188
1480 if (isa<StoreInst>(I0) && any_of(Insts, [](const Instruction *I) {
1481 return isa<AllocaInst>(I->getOperand(1));
1482 }))
1483 return false;
1484 if (isa<LoadInst>(I0) && any_of(Insts, [](const Instruction *I) {
1485 return isa<AllocaInst>(I->getOperand(0));
1486 }))
1487 return false;
1488
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001489 for (unsigned OI = 0, OE = I0->getNumOperands(); OI != OE; ++OI) {
1490 if (I0->getOperand(OI)->getType()->isTokenTy())
1491 // Don't touch any operand of token type.
1492 return false;
James Molloy104370a2016-09-11 09:00:03 +00001493
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001494 auto SameAsI0 = [&I0, OI](const Instruction *I) {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001495 assert(I->getNumOperands() == I0->getNumOperands());
1496 return I->getOperand(OI) == I0->getOperand(OI);
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001497 };
1498 if (!all_of(Insts, SameAsI0)) {
1499 if (!canReplaceOperandWithVariable(I0, OI))
1500 // We can't create a PHI from this GEP.
1501 return false;
James Molloy923e98c2016-08-31 10:46:16 +00001502 // Don't create indirect calls! The called value is the final operand.
1503 if ((isa<CallInst>(I0) || isa<InvokeInst>(I0)) && OI == OE - 1) {
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001504 // FIXME: if the call was *already* indirect, we should do this.
1505 return false;
James Molloy923e98c2016-08-31 10:46:16 +00001506 }
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001507 for (auto *I : Insts)
1508 PHIOperands[I].push_back(I->getOperand(OI));
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001509 }
1510 }
1511 return true;
1512}
1513
1514// Assuming canSinkLastInstruction(Blocks) has returned true, sink the last
1515// instruction of every block in Blocks to their common successor, commoning
1516// into one instruction.
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001517static bool sinkLastInstruction(ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks) {
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001518 auto *BBEnd = Blocks[0]->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
1519
1520 // canSinkLastInstruction returning true guarantees that every block has at
1521 // least one non-terminator instruction.
1522 SmallVector<Instruction*,4> Insts;
Dehao Chen018a3af2016-10-17 19:28:44 +00001523 for (auto *BB : Blocks) {
1524 Instruction *I = BB->getTerminator();
1525 do {
1526 I = I->getPrevNode();
1527 } while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I) && I != &BB->front());
1528 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
1529 Insts.push_back(I);
1530 }
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001531
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001532 // The only checking we need to do now is that all users of all instructions
1533 // are the same PHI node. canSinkLastInstruction should have checked this but
1534 // it is slightly over-aggressive - it gets confused by commutative instructions
1535 // so double-check it here.
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001536 Instruction *I0 = Insts.front();
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001537 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I0)) {
1538 auto *PNUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(*I0->user_begin());
1539 if (!all_of(Insts, [&PNUse](const Instruction *I) -> bool {
1540 auto *U = cast<Instruction>(*I->user_begin());
1541 return U == PNUse;
1542 }))
1543 return false;
1544 }
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001545
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001546 // We don't need to do any more checking here; canSinkLastInstruction should
1547 // have done it all for us.
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001548 SmallVector<Value*, 4> NewOperands;
1549 for (unsigned O = 0, E = I0->getNumOperands(); O != E; ++O) {
1550 // This check is different to that in canSinkLastInstruction. There, we
1551 // cared about the global view once simplifycfg (and instcombine) have
1552 // completed - it takes into account PHIs that become trivially
1553 // simplifiable. However here we need a more local view; if an operand
1554 // differs we create a PHI and rely on instcombine to clean up the very
1555 // small mess we may make.
1556 bool NeedPHI = any_of(Insts, [&I0, O](const Instruction *I) {
1557 return I->getOperand(O) != I0->getOperand(O);
1558 });
1559 if (!NeedPHI) {
1560 NewOperands.push_back(I0->getOperand(O));
1561 continue;
1562 }
1563
1564 // Create a new PHI in the successor block and populate it.
1565 auto *Op = I0->getOperand(O);
1566 assert(!Op->getType()->isTokenTy() && "Can't PHI tokens!");
1567 auto *PN = PHINode::Create(Op->getType(), Insts.size(),
1568 Op->getName() + ".sink", &BBEnd->front());
1569 for (auto *I : Insts)
1570 PN->addIncoming(I->getOperand(O), I->getParent());
1571 NewOperands.push_back(PN);
1572 }
1573
1574 // Arbitrarily use I0 as the new "common" instruction; remap its operands
1575 // and move it to the start of the successor block.
1576 for (unsigned O = 0, E = I0->getNumOperands(); O != E; ++O)
1577 I0->getOperandUse(O).set(NewOperands[O]);
1578 I0->moveBefore(&*BBEnd->getFirstInsertionPt());
1579
Robert Lougher5bf04162017-01-04 17:40:32 +00001580 // Update metadata and IR flags, and merge debug locations.
James Molloyd13b1232016-08-30 10:56:08 +00001581 for (auto *I : Insts)
James Molloy0efb96a2016-09-19 08:23:08 +00001582 if (I != I0) {
Dehao Chenf4646272017-10-02 18:13:14 +00001583 // The debug location for the "common" instruction is the merged locations
1584 // of all the commoned instructions. We start with the original location
1585 // of the "common" instruction and iteratively merge each location in the
1586 // loop below.
1587 // This is an N-way merge, which will be inefficient if I0 is a CallInst.
1588 // However, as N-way merge for CallInst is rare, so we use simplified API
1589 // instead of using complex API for N-way merge.
1590 I0->applyMergedLocation(I0->getDebugLoc(), I->getDebugLoc());
Florian Hahn406f1ff2018-08-24 11:40:04 +00001591 combineMetadataForCSE(I0, I, true);
James Molloy0efb96a2016-09-19 08:23:08 +00001592 I0->andIRFlags(I);
1593 }
James Molloyd13b1232016-08-30 10:56:08 +00001594
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001595 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I0)) {
1596 // canSinkLastInstruction checked that all instructions were used by
1597 // one and only one PHI node. Find that now, RAUW it to our common
1598 // instruction and nuke it.
1599 assert(I0->hasOneUse());
1600 auto *PN = cast<PHINode>(*I0->user_begin());
1601 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(I0);
1602 PN->eraseFromParent();
1603 }
1604
1605 // Finally nuke all instructions apart from the common instruction.
1606 for (auto *I : Insts)
1607 if (I != I0)
1608 I->eraseFromParent();
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001609
1610 return true;
1611}
1612
1613namespace {
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00001614
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001615 // LockstepReverseIterator - Iterates through instructions
1616 // in a set of blocks in reverse order from the first non-terminator.
1617 // For example (assume all blocks have size n):
1618 // LockstepReverseIterator I([B1, B2, B3]);
1619 // *I-- = [B1[n], B2[n], B3[n]];
1620 // *I-- = [B1[n-1], B2[n-1], B3[n-1]];
1621 // *I-- = [B1[n-2], B2[n-2], B3[n-2]];
1622 // ...
1623 class LockstepReverseIterator {
1624 ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks;
1625 SmallVector<Instruction*,4> Insts;
1626 bool Fail;
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00001627
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001628 public:
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00001629 LockstepReverseIterator(ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks) : Blocks(Blocks) {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001630 reset();
1631 }
1632
1633 void reset() {
1634 Fail = false;
1635 Insts.clear();
1636 for (auto *BB : Blocks) {
Dehao Chen018a3af2016-10-17 19:28:44 +00001637 Instruction *Inst = BB->getTerminator();
1638 for (Inst = Inst->getPrevNode(); Inst && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst);)
1639 Inst = Inst->getPrevNode();
1640 if (!Inst) {
1641 // Block wasn't big enough.
1642 Fail = true;
1643 return;
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001644 }
Dehao Chen018a3af2016-10-17 19:28:44 +00001645 Insts.push_back(Inst);
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001646 }
1647 }
1648
1649 bool isValid() const {
1650 return !Fail;
1651 }
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001652
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00001653 void operator--() {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001654 if (Fail)
1655 return;
1656 for (auto *&Inst : Insts) {
Dehao Chen018a3af2016-10-17 19:28:44 +00001657 for (Inst = Inst->getPrevNode(); Inst && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst);)
1658 Inst = Inst->getPrevNode();
Benjamin Kramerd8b07972016-10-15 13:15:05 +00001659 // Already at beginning of block.
1660 if (!Inst) {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001661 Fail = true;
1662 return;
1663 }
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001664 }
1665 }
1666
1667 ArrayRef<Instruction*> operator * () const {
1668 return Insts;
1669 }
1670 };
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00001671
1672} // end anonymous namespace
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001673
Michael Zolotukhinad371e02017-12-21 01:22:13 +00001674/// Check whether BB's predecessors end with unconditional branches. If it is
1675/// true, sink any common code from the predecessors to BB.
1676/// We also allow one predecessor to end with conditional branch (but no more
1677/// than one).
1678static bool SinkCommonCodeFromPredecessors(BasicBlock *BB) {
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001679 // We support two situations:
1680 // (1) all incoming arcs are unconditional
1681 // (2) one incoming arc is conditional
1682 //
1683 // (2) is very common in switch defaults and
1684 // else-if patterns;
1685 //
1686 // if (a) f(1);
1687 // else if (b) f(2);
1688 //
1689 // produces:
1690 //
1691 // [if]
1692 // / \
1693 // [f(1)] [if]
1694 // | | \
Amaury Sechet2fec7e42017-01-23 15:13:01 +00001695 // | | |
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001696 // | [f(2)]|
1697 // \ | /
1698 // [ end ]
1699 //
1700 // [end] has two unconditional predecessor arcs and one conditional. The
1701 // conditional refers to the implicit empty 'else' arc. This conditional
1702 // arc can also be caused by an empty default block in a switch.
1703 //
1704 // In this case, we attempt to sink code from all *unconditional* arcs.
1705 // If we can sink instructions from these arcs (determined during the scan
1706 // phase below) we insert a common successor for all unconditional arcs and
1707 // connect that to [end], to enable sinking:
1708 //
1709 // [if]
1710 // / \
1711 // [x(1)] [if]
1712 // | | \
1713 // | | \
1714 // | [x(2)] |
1715 // \ / |
1716 // [sink.split] |
1717 // \ /
1718 // [ end ]
1719 //
1720 SmallVector<BasicBlock*,4> UnconditionalPreds;
1721 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Michael Zolotukhinad371e02017-12-21 01:22:13 +00001722 for (auto *B : predecessors(BB)) {
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001723 auto *T = B->getTerminator();
1724 if (isa<BranchInst>(T) && cast<BranchInst>(T)->isUnconditional())
1725 UnconditionalPreds.push_back(B);
1726 else if ((isa<BranchInst>(T) || isa<SwitchInst>(T)) && !Cond)
1727 Cond = T;
1728 else
1729 return false;
1730 }
1731 if (UnconditionalPreds.size() < 2)
James Molloy475f4a72016-08-22 18:13:12 +00001732 return false;
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001733
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001734 bool Changed = false;
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001735 // We take a two-step approach to tail sinking. First we scan from the end of
1736 // each block upwards in lockstep. If the n'th instruction from the end of each
1737 // block can be sunk, those instructions are added to ValuesToSink and we
1738 // carry on. If we can sink an instruction but need to PHI-merge some operands
1739 // (because they're not identical in each instruction) we add these to
1740 // PHIOperands.
1741 unsigned ScanIdx = 0;
1742 SmallPtrSet<Value*,4> InstructionsToSink;
1743 DenseMap<Instruction*, SmallVector<Value*,4>> PHIOperands;
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001744 LockstepReverseIterator LRI(UnconditionalPreds);
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001745 while (LRI.isValid() &&
1746 canSinkInstructions(*LRI, PHIOperands)) {
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00001747 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: instruction can be sunk: " << *(*LRI)[0]
1748 << "\n");
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001749 InstructionsToSink.insert((*LRI).begin(), (*LRI).end());
1750 ++ScanIdx;
1751 --LRI;
1752 }
1753
James Molloy18d96e82016-09-11 08:07:30 +00001754 auto ProfitableToSinkInstruction = [&](LockstepReverseIterator &LRI) {
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001755 unsigned NumPHIdValues = 0;
1756 for (auto *I : *LRI)
1757 for (auto *V : PHIOperands[I])
1758 if (InstructionsToSink.count(V) == 0)
1759 ++NumPHIdValues;
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00001760 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: #phid values: " << NumPHIdValues << "\n");
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001761 unsigned NumPHIInsts = NumPHIdValues / UnconditionalPreds.size();
1762 if ((NumPHIdValues % UnconditionalPreds.size()) != 0)
1763 NumPHIInsts++;
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001764
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001765 return NumPHIInsts <= 1;
1766 };
1767
1768 if (ScanIdx > 0 && Cond) {
James Molloy18d96e82016-09-11 08:07:30 +00001769 // Check if we would actually sink anything first! This mutates the CFG and
1770 // adds an extra block. The goal in doing this is to allow instructions that
1771 // couldn't be sunk before to be sunk - obviously, speculatable instructions
1772 // (such as trunc, add) can be sunk and predicated already. So we check that
1773 // we're going to sink at least one non-speculatable instruction.
1774 LRI.reset();
1775 unsigned Idx = 0;
1776 bool Profitable = false;
1777 while (ProfitableToSinkInstruction(LRI) && Idx < ScanIdx) {
1778 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute((*LRI)[0])) {
1779 Profitable = true;
1780 break;
1781 }
1782 --LRI;
1783 ++Idx;
1784 }
1785 if (!Profitable)
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001786 return false;
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001787
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00001788 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: Splitting edge\n");
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001789 // We have a conditional edge and we're going to sink some instructions.
1790 // Insert a new block postdominating all blocks we're going to sink from.
Michael Zolotukhinad371e02017-12-21 01:22:13 +00001791 if (!SplitBlockPredecessors(BB, UnconditionalPreds, ".sink.split"))
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001792 // Edges couldn't be split.
1793 return false;
1794 Changed = true;
1795 }
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001796
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001797 // Now that we've analyzed all potential sinking candidates, perform the
1798 // actual sink. We iteratively sink the last non-terminator of the source
1799 // blocks into their common successor unless doing so would require too
1800 // many PHI instructions to be generated (currently only one PHI is allowed
1801 // per sunk instruction).
1802 //
1803 // We can use InstructionsToSink to discount values needing PHI-merging that will
1804 // actually be sunk in a later iteration. This allows us to be more
1805 // aggressive in what we sink. This does allow a false positive where we
1806 // sink presuming a later value will also be sunk, but stop half way through
1807 // and never actually sink it which means we produce more PHIs than intended.
1808 // This is unlikely in practice though.
1809 for (unsigned SinkIdx = 0; SinkIdx != ScanIdx; ++SinkIdx) {
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00001810 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: Sink: "
1811 << *UnconditionalPreds[0]->getTerminator()->getPrevNode()
1812 << "\n");
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001813
1814 // Because we've sunk every instruction in turn, the current instruction to
1815 // sink is always at index 0.
James Molloy18d96e82016-09-11 08:07:30 +00001816 LRI.reset();
1817 if (!ProfitableToSinkInstruction(LRI)) {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001818 // Too many PHIs would be created.
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00001819 LLVM_DEBUG(
1820 dbgs() << "SINK: stopping here, too many PHIs would be created!\n");
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001821 break;
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001822 }
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001823
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001824 if (!sinkLastInstruction(UnconditionalPreds))
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001825 return Changed;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001826 NumSinkCommons++;
1827 Changed = true;
1828 }
1829 return Changed;
1830}
1831
Adrian Prantl5f8f34e42018-05-01 15:54:18 +00001832/// Determine if we can hoist sink a sole store instruction out of a
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001833/// conditional block.
1834///
1835/// We are looking for code like the following:
1836/// BrBB:
1837/// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
1838/// ... // No other stores or function calls (we could be calling a memory
1839/// ... // function).
1840/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1841/// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
1842/// ThenBB:
1843/// store i32 %add5, i32* %arrayidx2
1844/// br label EndBB
1845/// EndBB:
1846/// ...
1847/// We are going to transform this into:
1848/// BrBB:
1849/// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
1850/// ... //
1851/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1852/// %add.add5 = select i1 %cmp, i32 %add, %add5
1853/// store i32 %add.add5, i32* %arrayidx2
1854/// ...
1855///
1856/// \return The pointer to the value of the previous store if the store can be
1857/// hoisted into the predecessor block. 0 otherwise.
Benjamin Kramerad5c24f2013-05-23 16:09:15 +00001858static Value *isSafeToSpeculateStore(Instruction *I, BasicBlock *BrBB,
1859 BasicBlock *StoreBB, BasicBlock *EndBB) {
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001860 StoreInst *StoreToHoist = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(I);
1861 if (!StoreToHoist)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001862 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001863
1864 // Volatile or atomic.
1865 if (!StoreToHoist->isSimple())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001866 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001867
1868 Value *StorePtr = StoreToHoist->getPointerOperand();
1869
1870 // Look for a store to the same pointer in BrBB.
Hans Wennborg0c3518e2016-05-04 15:40:57 +00001871 unsigned MaxNumInstToLookAt = 9;
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00001872 for (Instruction &CurI : reverse(BrBB->instructionsWithoutDebug())) {
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001873 if (!MaxNumInstToLookAt)
1874 break;
Hans Wennborg0c3518e2016-05-04 15:40:57 +00001875 --MaxNumInstToLookAt;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001876
David L Kreitzer96674172016-08-12 21:06:53 +00001877 // Could be calling an instruction that affects memory like free().
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001878 if (CurI.mayHaveSideEffects() && !isa<StoreInst>(CurI))
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001879 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001880
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001881 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&CurI)) {
1882 // Found the previous store make sure it stores to the same location.
1883 if (SI->getPointerOperand() == StorePtr)
1884 // Found the previous store, return its value operand.
1885 return SI->getValueOperand();
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001886 return nullptr; // Unknown store.
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001887 }
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001888 }
1889
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001890 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001891}
1892
Adrian Prantl5f8f34e42018-05-01 15:54:18 +00001893/// Speculate a conditional basic block flattening the CFG.
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001894///
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001895/// Note that this is a very risky transform currently. Speculating
1896/// instructions like this is most often not desirable. Instead, there is an MI
1897/// pass which can do it with full awareness of the resource constraints.
1898/// However, some cases are "obvious" and we should do directly. An example of
1899/// this is speculating a single, reasonably cheap instruction.
1900///
1901/// There is only one distinct advantage to flattening the CFG at the IR level:
1902/// it makes very common but simplistic optimizations such as are common in
1903/// instcombine and the DAG combiner more powerful by removing CFG edges and
1904/// modeling their effects with easier to reason about SSA value graphs.
1905///
1906///
1907/// An illustration of this transform is turning this IR:
1908/// \code
1909/// BB:
1910/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1911/// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
1912/// ThenBB:
1913/// %sub = sub %x, %y
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001914/// br label BB2
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001915/// EndBB:
1916/// %phi = phi [ %sub, %ThenBB ], [ 0, %EndBB ]
1917/// ...
1918/// \endcode
1919///
1920/// Into this IR:
1921/// \code
1922/// BB:
1923/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1924/// %sub = sub %x, %y
1925/// %cond = select i1 %cmp, 0, %sub
1926/// ...
1927/// \endcode
1928///
1929/// \returns true if the conditional block is removed.
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +00001930static bool SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BranchInst *BI, BasicBlock *ThenBB,
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00001931 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Chandler Carruth1d20c022013-01-24 08:22:40 +00001932 // Be conservative for now. FP select instruction can often be expensive.
1933 Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
1934 if (isa<FCmpInst>(BrCond))
1935 return false;
1936
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001937 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
1938 BasicBlock *EndBB = ThenBB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
1939
1940 // If ThenBB is actually on the false edge of the conditional branch, remember
1941 // to swap the select operands later.
1942 bool Invert = false;
1943 if (ThenBB != BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
1944 assert(ThenBB == BI->getSuccessor(1) && "No edge from 'if' block?");
1945 Invert = true;
1946 }
1947 assert(EndBB == BI->getSuccessor(!Invert) && "No edge from to end block");
1948
Craig Topper90c0a062018-10-01 22:56:11 +00001949 // Keep a count of how many times instructions are used within ThenBB when
1950 // they are candidates for sinking into ThenBB. Specifically:
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001951 // - They are defined in BB, and
1952 // - They have no side effects, and
Craig Topper90c0a062018-10-01 22:56:11 +00001953 // - All of their uses are in ThenBB.
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001954 SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4> SinkCandidateUseCounts;
1955
Bjorn Petterssone73b85d12017-11-02 11:55:14 +00001956 SmallVector<Instruction *, 4> SpeculatedDbgIntrinsics;
1957
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001958 unsigned SpeculationCost = 0;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001959 Value *SpeculatedStoreValue = nullptr;
1960 StoreInst *SpeculatedStore = nullptr;
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001961 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = ThenBB->begin(),
Benjamin Kramerb6d0bd42014-03-02 12:27:27 +00001962 BBE = std::prev(ThenBB->end());
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001963 BBI != BBE; ++BBI) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001964 Instruction *I = &*BBI;
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001965 // Skip debug info.
Bjorn Petterssone73b85d12017-11-02 11:55:14 +00001966 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
1967 SpeculatedDbgIntrinsics.push_back(I);
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001968 continue;
Bjorn Petterssone73b85d12017-11-02 11:55:14 +00001969 }
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001970
Mark Lacey274f48b2015-04-12 18:18:51 +00001971 // Only speculatively execute a single instruction (not counting the
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001972 // terminator) for now.
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001973 ++SpeculationCost;
1974 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001975 return false;
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001976
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001977 // Don't hoist the instruction if it's unsafe or expensive.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001978 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
1979 !(HoistCondStores && (SpeculatedStoreValue = isSafeToSpeculateStore(
1980 I, BB, ThenBB, EndBB))))
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001981 return false;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001982 if (!SpeculatedStoreValue &&
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001983 ComputeSpeculationCost(I, TTI) >
1984 PHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic)
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001985 return false;
1986
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001987 // Store the store speculation candidate.
1988 if (SpeculatedStoreValue)
1989 SpeculatedStore = cast<StoreInst>(I);
1990
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001991 // Do not hoist the instruction if any of its operands are defined but not
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001992 // used in BB. The transformation will prevent the operand from
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001993 // being sunk into the use block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001994 for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end(); i != e; ++i) {
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001995 Instruction *OpI = dyn_cast<Instruction>(*i);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001996 if (!OpI || OpI->getParent() != BB || OpI->mayHaveSideEffects())
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001997 continue; // Not a candidate for sinking.
1998
1999 ++SinkCandidateUseCounts[OpI];
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002000 }
2001 }
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002002
Craig Topper90c0a062018-10-01 22:56:11 +00002003 // Consider any sink candidates which are only used in ThenBB as costs for
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00002004 // speculation. Note, while we iterate over a DenseMap here, we are summing
2005 // and so iteration order isn't significant.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002006 for (SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4>::iterator
2007 I = SinkCandidateUseCounts.begin(),
2008 E = SinkCandidateUseCounts.end();
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00002009 I != E; ++I)
Craig Topperd616d332018-10-01 23:09:52 +00002010 if (I->first->hasNUses(I->second)) {
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00002011 ++SpeculationCost;
2012 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00002013 return false;
2014 }
2015
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002016 // Check that the PHI nodes can be converted to selects.
2017 bool HaveRewritablePHIs = false;
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00002018 for (PHINode &PN : EndBB->phis()) {
2019 Value *OrigV = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
2020 Value *ThenV = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(ThenBB);
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002021
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00002022 // FIXME: Try to remove some of the duplication with HoistThenElseCodeToIf.
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002023 // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00002024 if (ThenV == OrigV)
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002025 continue;
2026
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00002027 // Don't convert to selects if we could remove undefined behavior instead.
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00002028 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(OrigV, &PN) ||
2029 passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(ThenV, &PN))
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00002030 return false;
2031
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002032 HaveRewritablePHIs = true;
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00002033 ConstantExpr *OrigCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(OrigV);
2034 ConstantExpr *ThenCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(ThenV);
2035 if (!OrigCE && !ThenCE)
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00002036 continue; // Known safe and cheap.
2037
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002038 if ((ThenCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(ThenCE)) ||
2039 (OrigCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(OrigCE)))
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00002040 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002041 unsigned OrigCost = OrigCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(OrigCE, TTI) : 0;
2042 unsigned ThenCost = ThenCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(ThenCE, TTI) : 0;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002043 unsigned MaxCost =
2044 2 * PHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00002045 if (OrigCost + ThenCost > MaxCost)
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00002046 return false;
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002047
Chandler Carruth01bffaa2013-01-24 12:05:17 +00002048 // Account for the cost of an unfolded ConstantExpr which could end up
2049 // getting expanded into Instructions.
2050 // FIXME: This doesn't account for how many operations are combined in the
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00002051 // constant expression.
2052 ++SpeculationCost;
2053 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002054 return false;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002055 }
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002056
2057 // If there are no PHIs to process, bail early. This helps ensure idempotence
2058 // as well.
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002059 if (!HaveRewritablePHIs && !(HoistCondStores && SpeculatedStoreValue))
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002060 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002061
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002062 // If we get here, we can hoist the instruction and if-convert.
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00002063 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "SPECULATIVELY EXECUTING BB" << *ThenBB << "\n";);
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002064
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002065 // Insert a select of the value of the speculated store.
2066 if (SpeculatedStoreValue) {
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00002067 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(BI);
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002068 Value *TrueV = SpeculatedStore->getValueOperand();
2069 Value *FalseV = SpeculatedStoreValue;
2070 if (Invert)
2071 std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
Sanjay Patel796db352016-03-26 23:30:50 +00002072 Value *S = Builder.CreateSelect(
Craig Topper7c7fcab2017-10-31 19:03:51 +00002073 BrCond, TrueV, FalseV, "spec.store.select", BI);
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002074 SpeculatedStore->setOperand(0, S);
Dehao Chenf4646272017-10-02 18:13:14 +00002075 SpeculatedStore->applyMergedLocation(BI->getDebugLoc(),
2076 SpeculatedStore->getDebugLoc());
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002077 }
2078
Igor Laevsky7310c682015-11-18 14:50:18 +00002079 // Metadata can be dependent on the condition we are hoisting above.
2080 // Conservatively strip all metadata on the instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002081 for (auto &I : *ThenBB)
Igor Laevsky7310c682015-11-18 14:50:18 +00002082 I.dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
2083
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00002084 // Hoist the instructions.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002085 BB->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(), ThenBB->getInstList(),
2086 ThenBB->begin(), std::prev(ThenBB->end()));
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +00002087
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002088 // Insert selects and rewrite the PHI operands.
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00002089 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(BI);
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00002090 for (PHINode &PN : EndBB->phis()) {
2091 unsigned OrigI = PN.getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
2092 unsigned ThenI = PN.getBasicBlockIndex(ThenBB);
2093 Value *OrigV = PN.getIncomingValue(OrigI);
2094 Value *ThenV = PN.getIncomingValue(ThenI);
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002095
2096 // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
2097 if (OrigV == ThenV)
2098 continue;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002099
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002100 // Create a select whose true value is the speculatively executed value and
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002101 // false value is the preexisting value. Swap them if the branch
2102 // destinations were inverted.
2103 Value *TrueV = ThenV, *FalseV = OrigV;
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002104 if (Invert)
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002105 std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
Sanjay Patelf11ab052016-04-15 15:32:12 +00002106 Value *V = Builder.CreateSelect(
Craig Topper7c7fcab2017-10-31 19:03:51 +00002107 BrCond, TrueV, FalseV, "spec.select", BI);
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00002108 PN.setIncomingValue(OrigI, V);
2109 PN.setIncomingValue(ThenI, V);
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002110 }
2111
Bjorn Petterssone73b85d12017-11-02 11:55:14 +00002112 // Remove speculated dbg intrinsics.
2113 // FIXME: Is it possible to do this in a more elegant way? Moving/merging the
2114 // dbg value for the different flows and inserting it after the select.
2115 for (Instruction *I : SpeculatedDbgIntrinsics)
2116 I->eraseFromParent();
2117
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +00002118 ++NumSpeculations;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002119 return true;
2120}
2121
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002122/// Return true if we can thread a branch across this block.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00002123static bool BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BasicBlock *BB) {
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00002124 unsigned Size = 0;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002125
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00002126 for (Instruction &I : BB->instructionsWithoutDebug()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002127 if (Size > 10)
2128 return false; // Don't clone large BB's.
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00002129 ++Size;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002130
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00002131 // We can only support instructions that do not define values that are
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00002132 // live outside of the current basic block.
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00002133 for (User *U : I.users()) {
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00002134 Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002135 if (UI->getParent() != BB || isa<PHINode>(UI))
2136 return false;
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00002137 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002138
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00002139 // Looks ok, continue checking.
2140 }
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00002141
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00002142 return true;
2143}
2144
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002145/// If we have a conditional branch on a PHI node value that is defined in the
2146/// same block as the branch and if any PHI entries are constants, thread edges
2147/// corresponding to that entry to be branches to their ultimate destination.
Peter Collingbourne0609acc2017-02-15 03:01:11 +00002148static bool FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BranchInst *BI, const DataLayout &DL,
2149 AssumptionCache *AC) {
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002150 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
2151 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition());
Chris Lattner049cb442005-09-19 23:57:04 +00002152 // NOTE: we currently cannot transform this case if the PHI node is used
2153 // outside of the block.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00002154 if (!PN || PN->getParent() != BB || !PN->hasOneUse())
2155 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002156
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002157 // Degenerate case of a single entry PHI.
2158 if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 1) {
Chris Lattnerdc3f6f22008-12-03 19:44:02 +00002159 FoldSingleEntryPHINodes(PN->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002160 return true;
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002161 }
2162
2163 // Now we know that this block has multiple preds and two succs.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002164 if (!BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB))
2165 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002166
Justin Lebardb639492016-02-12 21:01:36 +00002167 // Can't fold blocks that contain noduplicate or convergent calls.
David Majnemer0a16c222016-08-11 21:15:00 +00002168 if (any_of(*BB, [](const Instruction &I) {
Justin Lebardb639492016-02-12 21:01:36 +00002169 const CallInst *CI = dyn_cast<CallInst>(&I);
2170 return CI && (CI->cannotDuplicate() || CI->isConvergent());
2171 }))
2172 return false;
Tom Stellarde1631dd2013-10-21 20:07:30 +00002173
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002174 // Okay, this is a simple enough basic block. See if any phi values are
2175 // constants.
Zhou Sheng75b871f2007-01-11 12:24:14 +00002176 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i) {
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002177 ConstantInt *CB = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValue(i));
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002178 if (!CB || !CB->getType()->isIntegerTy(1))
2179 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002180
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002181 // Okay, we now know that all edges from PredBB should be revectored to
2182 // branch to RealDest.
2183 BasicBlock *PredBB = PN->getIncomingBlock(i);
2184 BasicBlock *RealDest = BI->getSuccessor(!CB->getZExtValue());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002185
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002186 if (RealDest == BB)
2187 continue; // Skip self loops.
Bill Wendling4f163df2011-06-04 09:42:04 +00002188 // Skip if the predecessor's terminator is an indirect branch.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002189 if (isa<IndirectBrInst>(PredBB->getTerminator()))
2190 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002191
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002192 // The dest block might have PHI nodes, other predecessors and other
2193 // difficult cases. Instead of being smart about this, just insert a new
2194 // block that jumps to the destination block, effectively splitting
2195 // the edge we are about to create.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002196 BasicBlock *EdgeBB =
2197 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), RealDest->getName() + ".critedge",
2198 RealDest->getParent(), RealDest);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002199 BranchInst::Create(RealDest, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002200
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00002201 // Update PHI nodes.
2202 AddPredecessorToBlock(RealDest, EdgeBB, BB);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002203
2204 // BB may have instructions that are being threaded over. Clone these
2205 // instructions into EdgeBB. We know that there will be no uses of the
2206 // cloned instructions outside of EdgeBB.
2207 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = EdgeBB->begin();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002208 DenseMap<Value *, Value *> TranslateMap; // Track translated values.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002209 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); &*BBI != BI; ++BBI) {
2210 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)) {
2211 TranslateMap[PN] = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(PredBB);
2212 continue;
2213 }
2214 // Clone the instruction.
2215 Instruction *N = BBI->clone();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002216 if (BBI->hasName())
2217 N->setName(BBI->getName() + ".c");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002218
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002219 // Update operands due to translation.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002220 for (User::op_iterator i = N->op_begin(), e = N->op_end(); i != e; ++i) {
2221 DenseMap<Value *, Value *>::iterator PI = TranslateMap.find(*i);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002222 if (PI != TranslateMap.end())
2223 *i = PI->second;
2224 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002225
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002226 // Check for trivial simplification.
Daniel Berlin4d0fe642017-04-28 19:55:38 +00002227 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(N, {DL, nullptr, nullptr, AC})) {
David Majnemerb8da3a22016-06-25 00:04:10 +00002228 if (!BBI->use_empty())
2229 TranslateMap[&*BBI] = V;
2230 if (!N->mayHaveSideEffects()) {
Reid Kleckner96ab8722017-05-18 17:24:10 +00002231 N->deleteValue(); // Instruction folded away, don't need actual inst
David Majnemerb8da3a22016-06-25 00:04:10 +00002232 N = nullptr;
2233 }
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002234 } else {
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002235 if (!BBI->use_empty())
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002236 TranslateMap[&*BBI] = N;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002237 }
David Majnemerb8da3a22016-06-25 00:04:10 +00002238 // Insert the new instruction into its new home.
2239 if (N)
2240 EdgeBB->getInstList().insert(InsertPt, N);
Peter Collingbourne0609acc2017-02-15 03:01:11 +00002241
2242 // Register the new instruction with the assumption cache if necessary.
2243 if (auto *II = dyn_cast_or_null<IntrinsicInst>(N))
2244 if (II->getIntrinsicID() == Intrinsic::assume)
2245 AC->registerAssumption(II);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002246 }
2247
2248 // Loop over all of the edges from PredBB to BB, changing them to branch
2249 // to EdgeBB instead.
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00002250 Instruction *PredBBTI = PredBB->getTerminator();
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002251 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredBBTI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
2252 if (PredBBTI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
2253 BB->removePredecessor(PredBB);
2254 PredBBTI->setSuccessor(i, EdgeBB);
2255 }
Bill Wendling4f163df2011-06-04 09:42:04 +00002256
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002257 // Recurse, simplifying any other constants.
Justin Bogner6f1740d2018-08-20 06:37:11 +00002258 return FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DL, AC) || true;
Zhou Sheng75b871f2007-01-11 12:24:14 +00002259 }
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002260
2261 return false;
2262}
2263
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002264/// Given a BB that starts with the specified two-entry PHI node,
2265/// see if we can eliminate it.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002266static bool FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PHINode *PN, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
2267 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002268 // Ok, this is a two entry PHI node. Check to see if this is a simple "if
2269 // statement", which has a very simple dominance structure. Basically, we
2270 // are trying to find the condition that is being branched on, which
2271 // subsequently causes this merge to happen. We really want control
2272 // dependence information for this check, but simplifycfg can't keep it up
2273 // to date, and this catches most of the cases we care about anyway.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002274 BasicBlock *BB = PN->getParent();
Matt Morehouse236cdaf2018-03-22 17:07:51 +00002275 const Function *Fn = BB->getParent();
2276 if (Fn && Fn->hasFnAttribute(Attribute::OptForFuzzing))
2277 return false;
2278
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002279 BasicBlock *IfTrue, *IfFalse;
2280 Value *IfCond = GetIfCondition(BB, IfTrue, IfFalse);
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00002281 if (!IfCond ||
2282 // Don't bother if the branch will be constant folded trivially.
2283 isa<ConstantInt>(IfCond))
2284 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002285
Chris Lattner95adf8f12006-11-18 19:19:36 +00002286 // Okay, we found that we can merge this two-entry phi node into a select.
2287 // Doing so would require us to fold *all* two entry phi nodes in this block.
2288 // At some point this becomes non-profitable (particularly if the target
2289 // doesn't support cmov's). Only do this transformation if there are two or
2290 // fewer PHI nodes in this block.
2291 unsigned NumPhis = 0;
2292 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++NumPhis, ++I)
2293 if (NumPhis > 2)
2294 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002295
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002296 // Loop over the PHI's seeing if we can promote them all to select
2297 // instructions. While we are at it, keep track of the instructions
2298 // that need to be moved to the dominating block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002299 SmallPtrSet<Instruction *, 4> AggressiveInsts;
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +00002300 unsigned MaxCostVal0 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold,
2301 MaxCostVal1 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold;
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00002302 MaxCostVal0 *= TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
2303 MaxCostVal1 *= TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002304
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002305 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(II);) {
2306 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II++);
Daniel Berlin4d0fe642017-04-28 19:55:38 +00002307 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(PN, {DL, PN})) {
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00002308 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002309 PN->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00002310 continue;
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002311 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002312
Craig Topper029d1ef2018-10-04 23:40:31 +00002313 if (!DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(0), BB, AggressiveInsts,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002314 MaxCostVal0, TTI) ||
Craig Topper029d1ef2018-10-04 23:40:31 +00002315 !DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(1), BB, AggressiveInsts,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002316 MaxCostVal1, TTI))
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00002317 return false;
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002318 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002319
Sylvestre Ledru35521e22012-07-23 08:51:15 +00002320 // If we folded the first phi, PN dangles at this point. Refresh it. If
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002321 // we ran out of PHIs then we simplified them all.
2322 PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002323 if (!PN)
2324 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002325
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002326 // Don't fold i1 branches on PHIs which contain binary operators. These can
2327 // often be turned into switches and other things.
2328 if (PN->getType()->isIntegerTy(1) &&
2329 (isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(0)) ||
2330 isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(1)) ||
2331 isa<BinaryOperator>(IfCond)))
2332 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002333
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002334 // If all PHI nodes are promotable, check to make sure that all instructions
2335 // in the predecessor blocks can be promoted as well. If not, we won't be able
2336 // to get rid of the control flow, so it's not worth promoting to select
2337 // instructions.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002338 BasicBlock *DomBlock = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002339 BasicBlock *IfBlock1 = PN->getIncomingBlock(0);
2340 BasicBlock *IfBlock2 = PN->getIncomingBlock(1);
2341 if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock1->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002342 IfBlock1 = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002343 } else {
2344 DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock1);
Chandler Carruth9ae926b2018-08-26 09:51:22 +00002345 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock1->begin(); !I->isTerminator(); ++I)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002346 if (!AggressiveInsts.count(&*I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002347 // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002348 // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control flow, so
2349 // the xform is not worth it.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002350 return false;
2351 }
2352 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002353
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002354 if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock2->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002355 IfBlock2 = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002356 } else {
2357 DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock2);
Chandler Carruth9ae926b2018-08-26 09:51:22 +00002358 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock2->begin(); !I->isTerminator(); ++I)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002359 if (!AggressiveInsts.count(&*I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002360 // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002361 // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control flow, so
2362 // the xform is not worth it.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002363 return false;
2364 }
2365 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002366
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00002367 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOUND IF CONDITION! " << *IfCond
2368 << " T: " << IfTrue->getName()
2369 << " F: " << IfFalse->getName() << "\n");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002370
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002371 // If we can still promote the PHI nodes after this gauntlet of tests,
2372 // do all of the PHI's now.
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002373 Instruction *InsertPt = DomBlock->getTerminator();
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00002374 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(InsertPt);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002375
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002376 // Move all 'aggressive' instructions, which are defined in the
2377 // conditional parts of the if's up to the dominating block.
Carlos Alberto Enciso9a24e1a2018-10-25 09:58:59 +00002378 if (IfBlock1)
2379 hoistAllInstructionsInto(DomBlock, InsertPt, IfBlock1);
2380 if (IfBlock2)
2381 hoistAllInstructionsInto(DomBlock, InsertPt, IfBlock2);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002382
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002383 while (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin())) {
2384 // Change the PHI node into a select instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002385 Value *TrueVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfFalse);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002386 Value *FalseVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfTrue);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002387
Sanjay Patel9e23fed2016-03-17 15:30:52 +00002388 Value *Sel = Builder.CreateSelect(IfCond, TrueVal, FalseVal, "", InsertPt);
2389 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(Sel);
2390 Sel->takeName(PN);
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00002391 PN->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002392 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002393
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00002394 // At this point, IfBlock1 and IfBlock2 are both empty, so our if statement
2395 // has been flattened. Change DomBlock to jump directly to our new block to
2396 // avoid other simplifycfg's kicking in on the diamond.
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00002397 Instruction *OldTI = DomBlock->getTerminator();
Devang Patel5c810ce2011-05-18 18:16:44 +00002398 Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
2399 Builder.CreateBr(BB);
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00002400 OldTI->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002401 return true;
2402}
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002403
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002404/// If we found a conditional branch that goes to two returning blocks,
2405/// try to merge them together into one return,
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002406/// introducing a select if the return values disagree.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002407static bool SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BranchInst *BI,
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002408 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002409 assert(BI->isConditional() && "Must be a conditional branch");
2410 BasicBlock *TrueSucc = BI->getSuccessor(0);
2411 BasicBlock *FalseSucc = BI->getSuccessor(1);
2412 ReturnInst *TrueRet = cast<ReturnInst>(TrueSucc->getTerminator());
2413 ReturnInst *FalseRet = cast<ReturnInst>(FalseSucc->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002414
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002415 // Check to ensure both blocks are empty (just a return) or optionally empty
2416 // with PHI nodes. If there are other instructions, merging would cause extra
2417 // computation on one path or the other.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002418 if (!TrueSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
Devang Patel086b2122009-02-05 00:30:42 +00002419 return false;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002420 if (!FalseSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
Devang Patel086b2122009-02-05 00:30:42 +00002421 return false;
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002422
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002423 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002424 // Okay, we found a branch that is going to two return nodes. If
2425 // there is no return value for this function, just change the
2426 // branch into a return.
2427 if (FalseRet->getNumOperands() == 0) {
2428 TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
2429 FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002430 Builder.CreateRetVoid();
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00002431 EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002432 return true;
2433 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002434
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002435 // Otherwise, figure out what the true and false return values are
2436 // so we can insert a new select instruction.
2437 Value *TrueValue = TrueRet->getReturnValue();
2438 Value *FalseValue = FalseRet->getReturnValue();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002439
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002440 // Unwrap any PHI nodes in the return blocks.
2441 if (PHINode *TVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(TrueValue))
2442 if (TVPN->getParent() == TrueSucc)
2443 TrueValue = TVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent());
2444 if (PHINode *FVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(FalseValue))
2445 if (FVPN->getParent() == FalseSucc)
2446 FalseValue = FVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002447
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002448 // In order for this transformation to be safe, we must be able to
2449 // unconditionally execute both operands to the return. This is
2450 // normally the case, but we could have a potentially-trapping
2451 // constant expression that prevents this transformation from being
2452 // safe.
2453 if (ConstantExpr *TCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(TrueValue))
2454 if (TCV->canTrap())
2455 return false;
2456 if (ConstantExpr *FCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(FalseValue))
2457 if (FCV->canTrap())
2458 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002459
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002460 // Okay, we collected all the mapped values and checked them for sanity, and
2461 // defined to really do this transformation. First, update the CFG.
2462 TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
2463 FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002464
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002465 // Insert select instructions where needed.
2466 Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002467 if (TrueValue) {
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002468 // Insert a select if the results differ.
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002469 if (TrueValue == FalseValue || isa<UndefValue>(FalseValue)) {
2470 } else if (isa<UndefValue>(TrueValue)) {
2471 TrueValue = FalseValue;
2472 } else {
Sanjay Patelfacf45a2016-04-27 23:14:12 +00002473 TrueValue =
2474 Builder.CreateSelect(BrCond, TrueValue, FalseValue, "retval", BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002475 }
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002476 }
2477
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002478 Value *RI =
2479 !TrueValue ? Builder.CreateRetVoid() : Builder.CreateRet(TrueValue);
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002480
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002481 (void)RI;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002482
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00002483 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "\nCHANGING BRANCH TO TWO RETURNS INTO SELECT:"
2484 << "\n " << *BI << "NewRet = " << *RI << "TRUEBLOCK: "
2485 << *TrueSucc << "FALSEBLOCK: " << *FalseSucc);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002486
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00002487 EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(BI);
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00002488
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002489 return true;
2490}
2491
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002492/// Return true if the given instruction is available
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002493/// in its predecessor block. If yes, the instruction will be removed.
David Stenberg0af67e52018-05-18 08:52:15 +00002494static bool tryCSEWithPredecessor(Instruction *Inst, BasicBlock *PB) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002495 if (!isa<BinaryOperator>(Inst) && !isa<CmpInst>(Inst))
2496 return false;
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00002497 for (Instruction &I : *PB) {
2498 Instruction *PBI = &I;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002499 // Check whether Inst and PBI generate the same value.
2500 if (Inst->isIdenticalTo(PBI)) {
2501 Inst->replaceAllUsesWith(PBI);
2502 Inst->eraseFromParent();
2503 return true;
2504 }
2505 }
2506 return false;
2507}
Nick Lewycky3c3feaf2012-01-25 09:43:14 +00002508
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002509/// Return true if either PBI or BI has branch weight available, and store
2510/// the weights in {Pred|Succ}{True|False}Weight. If one of PBI and BI does
2511/// not have branch weight, use 1:1 as its weight.
2512static bool extractPredSuccWeights(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI,
2513 uint64_t &PredTrueWeight,
2514 uint64_t &PredFalseWeight,
2515 uint64_t &SuccTrueWeight,
2516 uint64_t &SuccFalseWeight) {
2517 bool PredHasWeights =
2518 PBI->extractProfMetadata(PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight);
2519 bool SuccHasWeights =
2520 BI->extractProfMetadata(SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
2521 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
2522 if (!PredHasWeights)
2523 PredTrueWeight = PredFalseWeight = 1;
2524 if (!SuccHasWeights)
2525 SuccTrueWeight = SuccFalseWeight = 1;
2526 return true;
2527 } else {
2528 return false;
2529 }
2530}
2531
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002532/// If this basic block is simple enough, and if a predecessor branches to us
2533/// and one of our successors, fold the block into the predecessor and use
2534/// logical operations to pick the right destination.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002535bool llvm::FoldBranchToCommonDest(BranchInst *BI, unsigned BonusInstThreshold) {
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002536 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002537
Philip Reames6bd16b52018-08-30 00:03:02 +00002538 const unsigned PredCount = pred_size(BB);
2539
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002540 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002541 if (BI->isConditional())
2542 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
2543 else {
2544 // For unconditional branch, check for a simple CFG pattern, where
2545 // BB has a single predecessor and BB's successor is also its predecessor's
Craig Topper36af40c2017-08-02 02:34:16 +00002546 // successor. If such pattern exists, check for CSE between BB and its
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002547 // predecessor.
2548 if (BasicBlock *PB = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
2549 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PB->getTerminator()))
2550 if (PBI->isConditional() &&
2551 (BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(0) ||
2552 BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(1))) {
David Stenberg0af67e52018-05-18 08:52:15 +00002553 for (auto I = BB->instructionsWithoutDebug().begin(),
2554 E = BB->instructionsWithoutDebug().end();
2555 I != E;) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002556 Instruction *Curr = &*I++;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002557 if (isa<CmpInst>(Curr)) {
2558 Cond = Curr;
2559 break;
2560 }
2561 // Quit if we can't remove this instruction.
David Stenberg0af67e52018-05-18 08:52:15 +00002562 if (!tryCSEWithPredecessor(Curr, PB))
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002563 return false;
2564 }
2565 }
2566
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002567 if (!Cond)
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002568 return false;
2569 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002570
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002571 if (!Cond || (!isa<CmpInst>(Cond) && !isa<BinaryOperator>(Cond)) ||
2572 Cond->getParent() != BB || !Cond->hasOneUse())
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002573 return false;
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002574
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002575 // Make sure the instruction after the condition is the cond branch.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002576 BasicBlock::iterator CondIt = ++Cond->getIterator();
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002577
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00002578 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002579 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(CondIt))
2580 ++CondIt;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002581
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002582 if (&*CondIt != BI)
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002583 return false;
Chris Lattnerea9f1d32009-01-19 23:03:13 +00002584
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002585 // Only allow this transformation if computing the condition doesn't involve
2586 // too many instructions and these involved instructions can be executed
2587 // unconditionally. We denote all involved instructions except the condition
2588 // as "bonus instructions", and only allow this transformation when the
Philip Reames6bd16b52018-08-30 00:03:02 +00002589 // number of the bonus instructions we'll need to create when cloning into
2590 // each predecessor does not exceed a certain threshold.
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002591 unsigned NumBonusInsts = 0;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithe9bc5792016-02-21 20:39:50 +00002592 for (auto I = BB->begin(); Cond != &*I; ++I) {
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002593 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
2594 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
2595 continue;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002596 if (!I->hasOneUse() || !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(&*I))
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002597 return false;
2598 // I has only one use and can be executed unconditionally.
2599 Instruction *User = dyn_cast<Instruction>(I->user_back());
2600 if (User == nullptr || User->getParent() != BB)
2601 return false;
2602 // I is used in the same BB. Since BI uses Cond and doesn't have more slots
2603 // to use any other instruction, User must be an instruction between next(I)
2604 // and Cond.
Philip Reames6bd16b52018-08-30 00:03:02 +00002605
2606 // Account for the cost of duplicating this instruction into each
2607 // predecessor.
2608 NumBonusInsts += PredCount;
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002609 // Early exits once we reach the limit.
2610 if (NumBonusInsts > BonusInstThreshold)
2611 return false;
2612 }
2613
Chris Lattnerea9f1d32009-01-19 23:03:13 +00002614 // Cond is known to be a compare or binary operator. Check to make sure that
2615 // neither operand is a potentially-trapping constant expression.
2616 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(0)))
2617 if (CE->canTrap())
2618 return false;
2619 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(1)))
2620 if (CE->canTrap())
2621 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002622
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002623 // Finally, don't infinitely unroll conditional loops.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002624 BasicBlock *TrueDest = BI->getSuccessor(0);
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002625 BasicBlock *FalseDest = (BI->isConditional()) ? BI->getSuccessor(1) : nullptr;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002626 if (TrueDest == BB || FalseDest == BB)
2627 return false;
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002628
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00002629 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) {
2630 BasicBlock *PredBlock = *PI;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002631 BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PredBlock->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002632
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002633 // Check that we have two conditional branches. If there is a PHI node in
2634 // the common successor, verify that the same value flows in from both
2635 // blocks.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002636 SmallVector<PHINode *, 4> PHIs;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002637 if (!PBI || PBI->isUnconditional() ||
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002638 (BI->isConditional() && !SafeToMergeTerminators(BI, PBI)) ||
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002639 (!BI->isConditional() &&
2640 !isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BI, PBI, Cond, PHIs)))
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002641 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002642
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002643 // Determine if the two branches share a common destination.
Axel Naumann4a127062012-09-17 14:20:57 +00002644 Instruction::BinaryOps Opc = Instruction::BinaryOpsEnd;
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002645 bool InvertPredCond = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002646
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002647 if (BI->isConditional()) {
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002648 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002649 Opc = Instruction::Or;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002650 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == FalseDest) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002651 Opc = Instruction::And;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002652 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == FalseDest) {
2653 Opc = Instruction::And;
2654 InvertPredCond = true;
2655 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == TrueDest) {
2656 Opc = Instruction::Or;
2657 InvertPredCond = true;
2658 } else {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002659 continue;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002660 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002661 } else {
2662 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) != TrueDest && PBI->getSuccessor(1) != TrueDest)
2663 continue;
2664 }
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002665
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00002666 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRANCH TO COMMON DEST:\n" << *PBI << *BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002667 IRBuilder<> Builder(PBI);
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002668
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002669 // If we need to invert the condition in the pred block to match, do so now.
2670 if (InvertPredCond) {
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002671 Value *NewCond = PBI->getCondition();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002672
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002673 if (NewCond->hasOneUse() && isa<CmpInst>(NewCond)) {
2674 CmpInst *CI = cast<CmpInst>(NewCond);
2675 CI->setPredicate(CI->getInversePredicate());
2676 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002677 NewCond =
2678 Builder.CreateNot(NewCond, PBI->getCondition()->getName() + ".not");
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002679 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002680
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002681 PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
Nick Lewycky8d302df2011-12-26 20:54:14 +00002682 PBI->swapSuccessors();
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002683 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002684
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002685 // If we have bonus instructions, clone them into the predecessor block.
Sanjay Pateladb110c2015-06-24 20:07:50 +00002686 // Note that there may be multiple predecessor blocks, so we cannot move
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002687 // bonus instructions to a predecessor block.
2688 ValueToValueMapTy VMap; // maps original values to cloned values
2689 // We already make sure Cond is the last instruction before BI. Therefore,
Sanjay Pateladb110c2015-06-24 20:07:50 +00002690 // all instructions before Cond other than DbgInfoIntrinsic are bonus
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002691 // instructions.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithe9bc5792016-02-21 20:39:50 +00002692 for (auto BonusInst = BB->begin(); Cond != &*BonusInst; ++BonusInst) {
Martin Storsjo22dcddf2018-08-30 08:06:50 +00002693 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BonusInst))
2694 continue;
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002695 Instruction *NewBonusInst = BonusInst->clone();
2696 RemapInstruction(NewBonusInst, VMap,
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithda68cbc2016-04-07 00:26:43 +00002697 RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingLocals);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002698 VMap[&*BonusInst] = NewBonusInst;
Rafael Espindolaab73c492014-01-28 16:56:46 +00002699
2700 // If we moved a load, we cannot any longer claim any knowledge about
2701 // its potential value. The previous information might have been valid
2702 // only given the branch precondition.
2703 // For an analogous reason, we must also drop all the metadata whose
2704 // semantics we don't understand.
Adrian Prantlcbdfdb72015-08-20 22:00:30 +00002705 NewBonusInst->dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
Rafael Espindolaab73c492014-01-28 16:56:46 +00002706
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002707 PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI->getIterator(), NewBonusInst);
2708 NewBonusInst->takeName(&*BonusInst);
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002709 BonusInst->setName(BonusInst->getName() + ".old");
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002710 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002711
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002712 // Clone Cond into the predecessor basic block, and or/and the
2713 // two conditions together.
Philip Reamesbed55612018-08-30 00:12:29 +00002714 Instruction *CondInPred = Cond->clone();
2715 RemapInstruction(CondInPred, VMap,
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithda68cbc2016-04-07 00:26:43 +00002716 RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingLocals);
Philip Reamesbed55612018-08-30 00:12:29 +00002717 PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI->getIterator(), CondInPred);
2718 CondInPred->takeName(Cond);
2719 Cond->setName(CondInPred->getName() + ".old");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002720
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002721 if (BI->isConditional()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002722 Instruction *NewCond = cast<Instruction>(
Philip Reamesbed55612018-08-30 00:12:29 +00002723 Builder.CreateBinOp(Opc, PBI->getCondition(), CondInPred, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002724 PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
2725
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002726 uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002727 bool HasWeights =
2728 extractPredSuccWeights(PBI, BI, PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight,
2729 SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002730 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> NewWeights;
2731
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002732 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002733 if (HasWeights) {
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002734 // PBI: br i1 %x, BB, FalseDest
2735 // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002736 // TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002737 NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002738 // FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002739 // TrueWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
2740 // We assume that total weights of a BranchInst can fit into 32 bits.
2741 // Therefore, we will not have overflow using 64-bit arithmetic.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002742 NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight *
2743 (SuccFalseWeight + SuccTrueWeight) +
2744 PredTrueWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002745 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002746 AddPredecessorToBlock(TrueDest, PredBlock, BB);
2747 PBI->setSuccessor(0, TrueDest);
2748 }
2749 if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) {
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002750 if (HasWeights) {
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002751 // PBI: br i1 %x, TrueDest, BB
2752 // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002753 // TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002754 // FalseWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002755 NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight *
2756 (SuccFalseWeight + SuccTrueWeight) +
2757 PredFalseWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
2758 // FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002759 NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
2760 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002761 AddPredecessorToBlock(FalseDest, PredBlock, BB);
2762 PBI->setSuccessor(1, FalseDest);
2763 }
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002764 if (NewWeights.size() == 2) {
2765 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
2766 FitWeights(NewWeights);
2767
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002768 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(NewWeights.begin(),
2769 NewWeights.end());
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00002770 setBranchWeights(PBI, MDWeights[0], MDWeights[1]);
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002771 } else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002772 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, nullptr);
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002773 } else {
2774 // Update PHI nodes in the common successors.
2775 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHIs.size(); i != e; ++i) {
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +00002776 ConstantInt *PBI_C = cast<ConstantInt>(
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002777 PHIs[i]->getIncomingValueForBlock(PBI->getParent()));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002778 assert(PBI_C->getType()->isIntegerTy(1));
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002779 Instruction *MergedCond = nullptr;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002780 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest) {
2781 // Create (PBI_Cond and PBI_C) or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value)
2782 // PBI_C is true: PBI_Cond or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value)
2783 // is false: !PBI_Cond and BI_Value
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002784 Instruction *NotCond = cast<Instruction>(
2785 Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(), "not.cond"));
2786 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(
Philip Reamesbed55612018-08-30 00:12:29 +00002787 Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::And, NotCond, CondInPred,
2788 "and.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002789 if (PBI_C->isOne())
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002790 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
2791 Instruction::Or, PBI->getCondition(), MergedCond, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002792 } else {
2793 // Create (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond and PBI_C)
2794 // PBI_C is true: (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond)
2795 // is false: PBI_Cond and BI_Value
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002796 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
Philip Reamesbed55612018-08-30 00:12:29 +00002797 Instruction::And, PBI->getCondition(), CondInPred, "and.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002798 if (PBI_C->isOne()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002799 Instruction *NotCond = cast<Instruction>(
2800 Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(), "not.cond"));
2801 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
2802 Instruction::Or, NotCond, MergedCond, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002803 }
2804 }
2805 // Update PHI Node.
2806 PHIs[i]->setIncomingValue(PHIs[i]->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent()),
2807 MergedCond);
2808 }
2809 // Change PBI from Conditional to Unconditional.
2810 BranchInst *New_PBI = BranchInst::Create(TrueDest, PBI);
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00002811 EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(PBI);
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002812 PBI = New_PBI;
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002813 }
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002814
Michael Kuperstein3ca147e2016-12-16 21:23:59 +00002815 // If BI was a loop latch, it may have had associated loop metadata.
2816 // We need to copy it to the new latch, that is, PBI.
2817 if (MDNode *LoopMD = BI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_loop))
2818 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_loop, LoopMD);
2819
Nick Lewyckyc554a9b2011-12-27 04:31:52 +00002820 // TODO: If BB is reachable from all paths through PredBlock, then we
2821 // could replace PBI's branch probabilities with BI's.
Martin Storsjo22dcddf2018-08-30 08:06:50 +00002822
2823 // Copy any debug value intrinsics into the end of PredBlock.
2824 for (Instruction &I : *BB)
2825 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
2826 I.clone()->insertBefore(PBI);
2827
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00002828 return true;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002829 }
2830 return false;
2831}
2832
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002833// If there is only one store in BB1 and BB2, return it, otherwise return
2834// nullptr.
2835static StoreInst *findUniqueStoreInBlocks(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2) {
2836 StoreInst *S = nullptr;
2837 for (auto *BB : {BB1, BB2}) {
2838 if (!BB)
2839 continue;
2840 for (auto &I : *BB)
2841 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I)) {
2842 if (S)
2843 // Multiple stores seen.
2844 return nullptr;
2845 else
2846 S = SI;
2847 }
2848 }
2849 return S;
2850}
2851
2852static Value *ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB,
2853 Value *AlternativeV = nullptr) {
2854 // PHI is going to be a PHI node that allows the value V that is defined in
2855 // BB to be referenced in BB's only successor.
2856 //
2857 // If AlternativeV is nullptr, the only value we care about in PHI is V. It
2858 // doesn't matter to us what the other operand is (it'll never get used). We
2859 // could just create a new PHI with an undef incoming value, but that could
2860 // increase register pressure if EarlyCSE/InstCombine can't fold it with some
2861 // other PHI. So here we directly look for some PHI in BB's successor with V
2862 // as an incoming operand. If we find one, we use it, else we create a new
2863 // one.
2864 //
2865 // If AlternativeV is not nullptr, we care about both incoming values in PHI.
2866 // PHI must be exactly: phi <ty> [ %BB, %V ], [ %OtherBB, %AlternativeV]
2867 // where OtherBB is the single other predecessor of BB's only successor.
2868 PHINode *PHI = nullptr;
2869 BasicBlock *Succ = BB->getSingleSuccessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002870
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002871 for (auto I = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++I)
2872 if (cast<PHINode>(I)->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB) == V) {
2873 PHI = cast<PHINode>(I);
2874 if (!AlternativeV)
2875 break;
2876
Vedant Kumare0b5f862018-05-10 23:01:54 +00002877 assert(pred_size(Succ) == 2);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002878 auto PredI = pred_begin(Succ);
2879 BasicBlock *OtherPredBB = *PredI == BB ? *++PredI : *PredI;
2880 if (PHI->getIncomingValueForBlock(OtherPredBB) == AlternativeV)
2881 break;
2882 PHI = nullptr;
2883 }
2884 if (PHI)
2885 return PHI;
2886
James Molloy3d21dcf2015-12-16 14:12:44 +00002887 // If V is not an instruction defined in BB, just return it.
2888 if (!AlternativeV &&
2889 (!isa<Instruction>(V) || cast<Instruction>(V)->getParent() != BB))
2890 return V;
2891
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00002892 PHI = PHINode::Create(V->getType(), 2, "simplifycfg.merge", &Succ->front());
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002893 PHI->addIncoming(V, BB);
2894 for (BasicBlock *PredBB : predecessors(Succ))
2895 if (PredBB != BB)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002896 PHI->addIncoming(
2897 AlternativeV ? AlternativeV : UndefValue::get(V->getType()), PredBB);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002898 return PHI;
2899}
2900
2901static bool mergeConditionalStoreToAddress(BasicBlock *PTB, BasicBlock *PFB,
2902 BasicBlock *QTB, BasicBlock *QFB,
2903 BasicBlock *PostBB, Value *Address,
Alexey Bataev978e2e42017-08-29 20:06:24 +00002904 bool InvertPCond, bool InvertQCond,
2905 const DataLayout &DL) {
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002906 auto IsaBitcastOfPointerType = [](const Instruction &I) {
2907 return Operator::getOpcode(&I) == Instruction::BitCast &&
2908 I.getType()->isPointerTy();
2909 };
2910
2911 // If we're not in aggressive mode, we only optimize if we have some
2912 // confidence that by optimizing we'll allow P and/or Q to be if-converted.
2913 auto IsWorthwhile = [&](BasicBlock *BB) {
2914 if (!BB)
2915 return true;
2916 // Heuristic: if the block can be if-converted/phi-folded and the
2917 // instructions inside are all cheap (arithmetic/GEPs), it's worthwhile to
2918 // thread this store.
James Molloy9e959ac2015-11-05 08:40:19 +00002919 unsigned N = 0;
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00002920 for (auto &I : BB->instructionsWithoutDebug()) {
James Molloy9e959ac2015-11-05 08:40:19 +00002921 // Cheap instructions viable for folding.
2922 if (isa<BinaryOperator>(I) || isa<GetElementPtrInst>(I) ||
2923 isa<StoreInst>(I))
2924 ++N;
2925 // Free instructions.
Chandler Carruth9ae926b2018-08-26 09:51:22 +00002926 else if (I.isTerminator() || IsaBitcastOfPointerType(I))
James Molloy9e959ac2015-11-05 08:40:19 +00002927 continue;
2928 else
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002929 return false;
James Molloy9e959ac2015-11-05 08:40:19 +00002930 }
Craig Topper12463772017-11-03 21:08:13 +00002931 // The store we want to merge is counted in N, so add 1 to make sure
2932 // we're counting the instructions that would be left.
2933 return N <= (PHINodeFoldingThreshold + 1);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002934 };
2935
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002936 if (!MergeCondStoresAggressively &&
2937 (!IsWorthwhile(PTB) || !IsWorthwhile(PFB) || !IsWorthwhile(QTB) ||
2938 !IsWorthwhile(QFB)))
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002939 return false;
2940
2941 // For every pointer, there must be exactly two stores, one coming from
2942 // PTB or PFB, and the other from QTB or QFB. We don't support more than one
2943 // store (to any address) in PTB,PFB or QTB,QFB.
2944 // FIXME: We could relax this restriction with a bit more work and performance
2945 // testing.
2946 StoreInst *PStore = findUniqueStoreInBlocks(PTB, PFB);
2947 StoreInst *QStore = findUniqueStoreInBlocks(QTB, QFB);
2948 if (!PStore || !QStore)
2949 return false;
2950
2951 // Now check the stores are compatible.
2952 if (!QStore->isUnordered() || !PStore->isUnordered())
2953 return false;
2954
2955 // Check that sinking the store won't cause program behavior changes. Sinking
2956 // the store out of the Q blocks won't change any behavior as we're sinking
2957 // from a block to its unconditional successor. But we're moving a store from
2958 // the P blocks down through the middle block (QBI) and past both QFB and QTB.
2959 // So we need to check that there are no aliasing loads or stores in
2960 // QBI, QTB and QFB. We also need to check there are no conflicting memory
2961 // operations between PStore and the end of its parent block.
2962 //
2963 // The ideal way to do this is to query AliasAnalysis, but we don't
2964 // preserve AA currently so that is dangerous. Be super safe and just
2965 // check there are no other memory operations at all.
2966 for (auto &I : *QFB->getSinglePredecessor())
2967 if (I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2968 return false;
2969 for (auto &I : *QFB)
2970 if (&I != QStore && I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2971 return false;
2972 if (QTB)
2973 for (auto &I : *QTB)
2974 if (&I != QStore && I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2975 return false;
2976 for (auto I = BasicBlock::iterator(PStore), E = PStore->getParent()->end();
2977 I != E; ++I)
2978 if (&*I != PStore && I->mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2979 return false;
2980
Craig Topper7d3aba62018-04-04 03:47:17 +00002981 // If PostBB has more than two predecessors, we need to split it so we can
2982 // sink the store.
2983 if (std::next(pred_begin(PostBB), 2) != pred_end(PostBB)) {
2984 // We know that QFB's only successor is PostBB. And QFB has a single
2985 // predecessor. If QTB exists, then its only successor is also PostBB.
2986 // If QTB does not exist, then QFB's only predecessor has a conditional
2987 // branch to QFB and PostBB.
2988 BasicBlock *TruePred = QTB ? QTB : QFB->getSinglePredecessor();
2989 BasicBlock *NewBB = SplitBlockPredecessors(PostBB, { QFB, TruePred},
2990 "condstore.split");
2991 if (!NewBB)
2992 return false;
2993 PostBB = NewBB;
2994 }
2995
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002996 // OK, we're going to sink the stores to PostBB. The store has to be
2997 // conditional though, so first create the predicate.
2998 Value *PCond = cast<BranchInst>(PFB->getSinglePredecessor()->getTerminator())
2999 ->getCondition();
3000 Value *QCond = cast<BranchInst>(QFB->getSinglePredecessor()->getTerminator())
3001 ->getCondition();
3002
3003 Value *PPHI = ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(PStore->getValueOperand(),
3004 PStore->getParent());
3005 Value *QPHI = ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(QStore->getValueOperand(),
3006 QStore->getParent(), PPHI);
3007
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00003008 IRBuilder<> QB(&*PostBB->getFirstInsertionPt());
3009
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003010 Value *PPred = PStore->getParent() == PTB ? PCond : QB.CreateNot(PCond);
3011 Value *QPred = QStore->getParent() == QTB ? QCond : QB.CreateNot(QCond);
3012
3013 if (InvertPCond)
3014 PPred = QB.CreateNot(PPred);
3015 if (InvertQCond)
3016 QPred = QB.CreateNot(QPred);
3017 Value *CombinedPred = QB.CreateOr(PPred, QPred);
3018
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00003019 auto *T =
3020 SplitBlockAndInsertIfThen(CombinedPred, &*QB.GetInsertPoint(), false);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003021 QB.SetInsertPoint(T);
3022 StoreInst *SI = cast<StoreInst>(QB.CreateStore(QPHI, Address));
3023 AAMDNodes AAMD;
3024 PStore->getAAMetadata(AAMD, /*Merge=*/false);
3025 PStore->getAAMetadata(AAMD, /*Merge=*/true);
3026 SI->setAAMetadata(AAMD);
Alexey Bataev978e2e42017-08-29 20:06:24 +00003027 unsigned PAlignment = PStore->getAlignment();
3028 unsigned QAlignment = QStore->getAlignment();
3029 unsigned TypeAlignment =
3030 DL.getABITypeAlignment(SI->getValueOperand()->getType());
3031 unsigned MinAlignment;
3032 unsigned MaxAlignment;
3033 std::tie(MinAlignment, MaxAlignment) = std::minmax(PAlignment, QAlignment);
3034 // Choose the minimum alignment. If we could prove both stores execute, we
3035 // could use biggest one. In this case, though, we only know that one of the
3036 // stores executes. And we don't know it's safe to take the alignment from a
3037 // store that doesn't execute.
3038 if (MinAlignment != 0) {
3039 // Choose the minimum of all non-zero alignments.
3040 SI->setAlignment(MinAlignment);
3041 } else if (MaxAlignment != 0) {
3042 // Choose the minimal alignment between the non-zero alignment and the ABI
3043 // default alignment for the type of the stored value.
3044 SI->setAlignment(std::min(MaxAlignment, TypeAlignment));
3045 } else {
3046 // If both alignments are zero, use ABI default alignment for the type of
3047 // the stored value.
3048 SI->setAlignment(TypeAlignment);
3049 }
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003050
3051 QStore->eraseFromParent();
3052 PStore->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003053
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003054 return true;
3055}
3056
Alexey Bataev978e2e42017-08-29 20:06:24 +00003057static bool mergeConditionalStores(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *QBI,
3058 const DataLayout &DL) {
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003059 // The intention here is to find diamonds or triangles (see below) where each
3060 // conditional block contains a store to the same address. Both of these
3061 // stores are conditional, so they can't be unconditionally sunk. But it may
3062 // be profitable to speculatively sink the stores into one merged store at the
3063 // end, and predicate the merged store on the union of the two conditions of
3064 // PBI and QBI.
3065 //
3066 // This can reduce the number of stores executed if both of the conditions are
3067 // true, and can allow the blocks to become small enough to be if-converted.
3068 // This optimization will also chain, so that ladders of test-and-set
3069 // sequences can be if-converted away.
3070 //
3071 // We only deal with simple diamonds or triangles:
3072 //
3073 // PBI or PBI or a combination of the two
3074 // / \ | \
3075 // PTB PFB | PFB
3076 // \ / | /
3077 // QBI QBI
3078 // / \ | \
3079 // QTB QFB | QFB
3080 // \ / | /
3081 // PostBB PostBB
3082 //
3083 // We model triangles as a type of diamond with a nullptr "true" block.
3084 // Triangles are canonicalized so that the fallthrough edge is represented by
3085 // a true condition, as in the diagram above.
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003086 BasicBlock *PTB = PBI->getSuccessor(0);
3087 BasicBlock *PFB = PBI->getSuccessor(1);
3088 BasicBlock *QTB = QBI->getSuccessor(0);
3089 BasicBlock *QFB = QBI->getSuccessor(1);
3090 BasicBlock *PostBB = QFB->getSingleSuccessor();
3091
Craig Topper7af07882017-04-21 15:53:42 +00003092 // Make sure we have a good guess for PostBB. If QTB's only successor is
3093 // QFB, then QFB is a better PostBB.
3094 if (QTB->getSingleSuccessor() == QFB)
3095 PostBB = QFB;
3096
3097 // If we couldn't find a good PostBB, stop.
3098 if (!PostBB)
3099 return false;
3100
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003101 bool InvertPCond = false, InvertQCond = false;
3102 // Canonicalize fallthroughs to the true branches.
3103 if (PFB == QBI->getParent()) {
3104 std::swap(PFB, PTB);
3105 InvertPCond = true;
3106 }
3107 if (QFB == PostBB) {
3108 std::swap(QFB, QTB);
3109 InvertQCond = true;
3110 }
3111
3112 // From this point on we can assume PTB or QTB may be fallthroughs but PFB
3113 // and QFB may not. Model fallthroughs as a nullptr block.
3114 if (PTB == QBI->getParent())
3115 PTB = nullptr;
3116 if (QTB == PostBB)
3117 QTB = nullptr;
3118
3119 // Legality bailouts. We must have at least the non-fallthrough blocks and
3120 // the post-dominating block, and the non-fallthroughs must only have one
3121 // predecessor.
3122 auto HasOnePredAndOneSucc = [](BasicBlock *BB, BasicBlock *P, BasicBlock *S) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003123 return BB->getSinglePredecessor() == P && BB->getSingleSuccessor() == S;
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003124 };
Craig Topper7af07882017-04-21 15:53:42 +00003125 if (!HasOnePredAndOneSucc(PFB, PBI->getParent(), QBI->getParent()) ||
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003126 !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(QFB, QBI->getParent(), PostBB))
3127 return false;
3128 if ((PTB && !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(PTB, PBI->getParent(), QBI->getParent())) ||
3129 (QTB && !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(QTB, QBI->getParent(), PostBB)))
3130 return false;
Craig Topper7d3aba62018-04-04 03:47:17 +00003131 if (!QBI->getParent()->hasNUses(2))
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003132 return false;
3133
3134 // OK, this is a sequence of two diamonds or triangles.
3135 // Check if there are stores in PTB or PFB that are repeated in QTB or QFB.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003136 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 4> PStoreAddresses, QStoreAddresses;
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003137 for (auto *BB : {PTB, PFB}) {
3138 if (!BB)
3139 continue;
3140 for (auto &I : *BB)
3141 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I))
3142 PStoreAddresses.insert(SI->getPointerOperand());
3143 }
3144 for (auto *BB : {QTB, QFB}) {
3145 if (!BB)
3146 continue;
3147 for (auto &I : *BB)
3148 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I))
3149 QStoreAddresses.insert(SI->getPointerOperand());
3150 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003151
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003152 set_intersect(PStoreAddresses, QStoreAddresses);
3153 // set_intersect mutates PStoreAddresses in place. Rename it here to make it
3154 // clear what it contains.
3155 auto &CommonAddresses = PStoreAddresses;
3156
3157 bool Changed = false;
3158 for (auto *Address : CommonAddresses)
3159 Changed |= mergeConditionalStoreToAddress(
Alexey Bataev978e2e42017-08-29 20:06:24 +00003160 PTB, PFB, QTB, QFB, PostBB, Address, InvertPCond, InvertQCond, DL);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003161 return Changed;
3162}
3163
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003164/// If we have a conditional branch as a predecessor of another block,
3165/// this function tries to simplify it. We know
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003166/// that PBI and BI are both conditional branches, and BI is in one of the
3167/// successor blocks of PBI - PBI branches to BI.
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00003168static bool SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI,
3169 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003170 assert(PBI->isConditional() && BI->isConditional());
3171 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Dan Gohman5476cfd2009-08-12 16:23:25 +00003172
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003173 // If this block ends with a branch instruction, and if there is a
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003174 // predecessor that ends on a branch of the same condition, make
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003175 // this conditional branch redundant.
3176 if (PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
3177 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3178 // Okay, the outcome of this conditional branch is statically
3179 // knowable. If this block had a single pred, handle specially.
3180 if (BB->getSinglePredecessor()) {
3181 // Turn this into a branch on constant.
3182 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003183 BI->setCondition(
3184 ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), CondIsTrue));
3185 return true; // Nuke the branch on constant.
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003186 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003187
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003188 // Otherwise, if there are multiple predecessors, insert a PHI that merges
3189 // in the constant and simplify the block result. Subsequent passes of
3190 // simplifycfg will thread the block.
3191 if (BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB)) {
Jay Foade0938d82011-03-30 11:19:20 +00003192 pred_iterator PB = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003193 PHINode *NewPN = PHINode::Create(
3194 Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), std::distance(PB, PE),
3195 BI->getCondition()->getName() + ".pr", &BB->front());
Chris Lattner5eed3722008-07-13 21:55:46 +00003196 // Okay, we're going to insert the PHI node. Since PBI is not the only
3197 // predecessor, compute the PHI'd conditional value for all of the preds.
3198 // Any predecessor where the condition is not computable we keep symbolic.
Jay Foade0938d82011-03-30 11:19:20 +00003199 for (pred_iterator PI = PB; PI != PE; ++PI) {
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00003200 BasicBlock *P = *PI;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003201 if ((PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(P->getTerminator())) && PBI != BI &&
3202 PBI->isConditional() && PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003203 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3204 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003205 NewPN->addIncoming(
3206 ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), CondIsTrue),
3207 P);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003208 } else {
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00003209 NewPN->addIncoming(BI->getCondition(), P);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003210 }
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00003211 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003212
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003213 BI->setCondition(NewPN);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003214 return true;
3215 }
3216 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003217
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00003218 if (auto *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BI->getCondition()))
3219 if (CE->canTrap())
3220 return false;
3221
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003222 // If both branches are conditional and both contain stores to the same
3223 // address, remove the stores from the conditionals and create a conditional
3224 // merged store at the end.
Alexey Bataev978e2e42017-08-29 20:06:24 +00003225 if (MergeCondStores && mergeConditionalStores(PBI, BI, DL))
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003226 return true;
3227
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003228 // If this is a conditional branch in an empty block, and if any
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00003229 // predecessors are a conditional branch to one of our destinations,
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003230 // fold the conditions into logical ops and one cond br.
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00003231
Zhou Sheng264e46e2009-02-26 06:56:37 +00003232 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00003233 if (&*BB->instructionsWithoutDebug().begin() != BI)
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003234 return false;
Chris Lattnerc59945b2009-01-20 01:15:41 +00003235
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003236 int PBIOp, BIOp;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00003237 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
3238 PBIOp = 0;
3239 BIOp = 0;
3240 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3241 PBIOp = 0;
3242 BIOp = 1;
3243 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
3244 PBIOp = 1;
3245 BIOp = 0;
3246 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3247 PBIOp = 1;
3248 BIOp = 1;
3249 } else {
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003250 return false;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00003251 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003252
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003253 // Check to make sure that the other destination of this branch
3254 // isn't BB itself. If so, this is an infinite loop that will
3255 // keep getting unwound.
3256 if (PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp) == BB)
3257 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003258
3259 // Do not perform this transformation if it would require
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003260 // insertion of a large number of select instructions. For targets
3261 // without predication/cmovs, this is a big pessimization.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003262
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00003263 // Also do not perform this transformation if any phi node in the common
3264 // destination block can trap when reached by BB or PBB (PR17073). In that
3265 // case, it would be unsafe to hoist the operation into a select instruction.
3266
3267 BasicBlock *CommonDest = PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003268 unsigned NumPhis = 0;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003269 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = CommonDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(II);
3270 ++II, ++NumPhis) {
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003271 if (NumPhis > 2) // Disable this xform.
3272 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003273
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00003274 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II);
3275 Value *BIV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
3276 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BIV))
3277 if (CE->canTrap())
3278 return false;
3279
3280 unsigned PBBIdx = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
3281 Value *PBIV = PN->getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
3282 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(PBIV))
3283 if (CE->canTrap())
3284 return false;
3285 }
3286
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003287 // Finally, if everything is ok, fold the branches to logical ops.
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00003288 BasicBlock *OtherDest = BI->getSuccessor(BIOp ^ 1);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003289
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00003290 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRs:" << *PBI->getParent()
3291 << "AND: " << *BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003292
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00003293 // If OtherDest *is* BB, then BB is a basic block with a single conditional
3294 // branch in it, where one edge (OtherDest) goes back to itself but the other
3295 // exits. We don't *know* that the program avoids the infinite loop
3296 // (even though that seems likely). If we do this xform naively, we'll end up
3297 // recursively unpeeling the loop. Since we know that (after the xform is
3298 // done) that the block *is* infinite if reached, we just make it an obviously
3299 // infinite loop with no cond branch.
3300 if (OtherDest == BB) {
3301 // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
3302 // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003303 BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock =
3304 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "infloop", BB->getParent());
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00003305 BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
3306 OtherDest = InfLoopBlock;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003307 }
3308
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00003309 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003310
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003311 // BI may have other predecessors. Because of this, we leave
3312 // it alone, but modify PBI.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003313
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003314 // Make sure we get to CommonDest on True&True directions.
3315 Value *PBICond = PBI->getCondition();
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00003316 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(PBI);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003317 if (PBIOp)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003318 PBICond = Builder.CreateNot(PBICond, PBICond->getName() + ".not");
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003319
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003320 Value *BICond = BI->getCondition();
3321 if (BIOp)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003322 BICond = Builder.CreateNot(BICond, BICond->getName() + ".not");
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003323
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003324 // Merge the conditions.
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003325 Value *Cond = Builder.CreateOr(PBICond, BICond, "brmerge");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003326
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003327 // Modify PBI to branch on the new condition to the new dests.
3328 PBI->setCondition(Cond);
3329 PBI->setSuccessor(0, CommonDest);
3330 PBI->setSuccessor(1, OtherDest);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003331
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003332 // Update branch weight for PBI.
3333 uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00003334 uint64_t PredCommon, PredOther, SuccCommon, SuccOther;
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00003335 bool HasWeights =
3336 extractPredSuccWeights(PBI, BI, PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight,
3337 SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00003338 if (HasWeights) {
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00003339 PredCommon = PBIOp ? PredFalseWeight : PredTrueWeight;
3340 PredOther = PBIOp ? PredTrueWeight : PredFalseWeight;
3341 SuccCommon = BIOp ? SuccFalseWeight : SuccTrueWeight;
3342 SuccOther = BIOp ? SuccTrueWeight : SuccFalseWeight;
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003343 // The weight to CommonDest should be PredCommon * SuccTotal +
3344 // PredOther * SuccCommon.
3345 // The weight to OtherDest should be PredOther * SuccOther.
Benjamin Kramerea68a942015-02-19 15:26:17 +00003346 uint64_t NewWeights[2] = {PredCommon * (SuccCommon + SuccOther) +
3347 PredOther * SuccCommon,
3348 PredOther * SuccOther};
Sanjay Patel84a0bf62016-05-06 17:51:37 +00003349 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003350 FitWeights(NewWeights);
3351
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00003352 setBranchWeights(PBI, NewWeights[0], NewWeights[1]);
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003353 }
3354
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003355 // OtherDest may have phi nodes. If so, add an entry from PBI's
3356 // block that are identical to the entries for BI's block.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00003357 AddPredecessorToBlock(OtherDest, PBI->getParent(), BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003358
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003359 // We know that the CommonDest already had an edge from PBI to
3360 // it. If it has PHIs though, the PHIs may have different
3361 // entries for BB and PBI's BB. If so, insert a select to make
3362 // them agree.
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00003363 for (PHINode &PN : CommonDest->phis()) {
3364 Value *BIV = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
3365 unsigned PBBIdx = PN.getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
3366 Value *PBIV = PN.getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003367 if (BIV != PBIV) {
3368 // Insert a select in PBI to pick the right value.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003369 SelectInst *NV = cast<SelectInst>(
3370 Builder.CreateSelect(PBICond, PBIV, BIV, PBIV->getName() + ".mux"));
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00003371 PN.setIncomingValue(PBBIdx, NV);
Sanjay Patel1cb62412016-05-06 18:07:46 +00003372 // Although the select has the same condition as PBI, the original branch
3373 // weights for PBI do not apply to the new select because the select's
3374 // 'logical' edges are incoming edges of the phi that is eliminated, not
3375 // the outgoing edges of PBI.
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00003376 if (HasWeights) {
Sanjay Patel1cb62412016-05-06 18:07:46 +00003377 uint64_t PredCommon = PBIOp ? PredFalseWeight : PredTrueWeight;
3378 uint64_t PredOther = PBIOp ? PredTrueWeight : PredFalseWeight;
3379 uint64_t SuccCommon = BIOp ? SuccFalseWeight : SuccTrueWeight;
3380 uint64_t SuccOther = BIOp ? SuccTrueWeight : SuccFalseWeight;
3381 // The weight to PredCommonDest should be PredCommon * SuccTotal.
3382 // The weight to PredOtherDest should be PredOther * SuccCommon.
3383 uint64_t NewWeights[2] = {PredCommon * (SuccCommon + SuccOther),
3384 PredOther * SuccCommon};
3385
3386 FitWeights(NewWeights);
3387
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00003388 setBranchWeights(NV, NewWeights[0], NewWeights[1]);
Sanjay Patel1cb62412016-05-06 18:07:46 +00003389 }
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003390 }
3391 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003392
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00003393 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "INTO: " << *PBI->getParent());
3394 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003395
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003396 // This basic block is probably dead. We know it has at least
3397 // one fewer predecessor.
3398 return true;
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003399}
3400
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003401// Simplifies a terminator by replacing it with a branch to TrueBB if Cond is
3402// true or to FalseBB if Cond is false.
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003403// Takes care of updating the successors and removing the old terminator.
3404// Also makes sure not to introduce new successors by assuming that edges to
3405// non-successor TrueBBs and FalseBBs aren't reachable.
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00003406static bool SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(Instruction *OldTerm, Value *Cond,
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003407 BasicBlock *TrueBB, BasicBlock *FalseBB,
3408 uint32_t TrueWeight,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003409 uint32_t FalseWeight) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003410 // Remove any superfluous successor edges from the CFG.
3411 // First, figure out which successors to preserve.
3412 // If TrueBB and FalseBB are equal, only try to preserve one copy of that
3413 // successor.
3414 BasicBlock *KeepEdge1 = TrueBB;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003415 BasicBlock *KeepEdge2 = TrueBB != FalseBB ? FalseBB : nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003416
3417 // Then remove the rest.
Chandler Carruth96fc1de2018-08-26 08:41:15 +00003418 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(OldTerm)) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003419 // Make sure only to keep exactly one copy of each edge.
3420 if (Succ == KeepEdge1)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003421 KeepEdge1 = nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003422 else if (Succ == KeepEdge2)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003423 KeepEdge2 = nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003424 else
David Majnemerdc3b67b2015-10-21 18:22:24 +00003425 Succ->removePredecessor(OldTerm->getParent(),
3426 /*DontDeleteUselessPHIs=*/true);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003427 }
3428
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003429 IRBuilder<> Builder(OldTerm);
3430 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(OldTerm->getDebugLoc());
3431
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003432 // Insert an appropriate new terminator.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003433 if (!KeepEdge1 && !KeepEdge2) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003434 if (TrueBB == FalseBB)
3435 // We were only looking for one successor, and it was present.
3436 // Create an unconditional branch to it.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003437 Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003438 else {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003439 // We found both of the successors we were looking for.
3440 // Create a conditional branch sharing the condition of the select.
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003441 BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cond, TrueBB, FalseBB);
3442 if (TrueWeight != FalseWeight)
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00003443 setBranchWeights(NewBI, TrueWeight, FalseWeight);
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003444 }
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003445 } else if (KeepEdge1 && (KeepEdge2 || TrueBB == FalseBB)) {
3446 // Neither of the selected blocks were successors, so this
3447 // terminator must be unreachable.
3448 new UnreachableInst(OldTerm->getContext(), OldTerm);
3449 } else {
3450 // One of the selected values was a successor, but the other wasn't.
3451 // Insert an unconditional branch to the one that was found;
3452 // the edge to the one that wasn't must be unreachable.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003453 if (!KeepEdge1)
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003454 // Only TrueBB was found.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003455 Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003456 else
3457 // Only FalseBB was found.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003458 Builder.CreateBr(FalseBB);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003459 }
3460
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00003461 EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(OldTerm);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003462 return true;
3463}
3464
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003465// Replaces
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003466// (switch (select cond, X, Y)) on constant X, Y
3467// with a branch - conditional if X and Y lead to distinct BBs,
3468// unconditional otherwise.
3469static bool SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SwitchInst *SI, SelectInst *Select) {
3470 // Check for constant integer values in the select.
3471 ConstantInt *TrueVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getTrueValue());
3472 ConstantInt *FalseVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getFalseValue());
3473 if (!TrueVal || !FalseVal)
3474 return false;
3475
3476 // Find the relevant condition and destinations.
3477 Value *Condition = Select->getCondition();
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00003478 BasicBlock *TrueBB = SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal)->getCaseSuccessor();
3479 BasicBlock *FalseBB = SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal)->getCaseSuccessor();
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003480
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003481 // Get weight for TrueBB and FalseBB.
3482 uint32_t TrueWeight = 0, FalseWeight = 0;
3483 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
3484 bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
3485 if (HasWeights) {
3486 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3487 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003488 TrueWeight =
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00003489 (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal)->getSuccessorIndex()];
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003490 FalseWeight =
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00003491 (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal)->getSuccessorIndex()];
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003492 }
3493 }
3494
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003495 // Perform the actual simplification.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003496 return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(SI, Condition, TrueBB, FalseBB, TrueWeight,
3497 FalseWeight);
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003498}
3499
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003500// Replaces
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +00003501// (indirectbr (select cond, blockaddress(@fn, BlockA),
3502// blockaddress(@fn, BlockB)))
3503// with
3504// (br cond, BlockA, BlockB).
3505static bool SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IndirectBrInst *IBI, SelectInst *SI) {
3506 // Check that both operands of the select are block addresses.
3507 BlockAddress *TBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getTrueValue());
3508 BlockAddress *FBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getFalseValue());
3509 if (!TBA || !FBA)
3510 return false;
3511
3512 // Extract the actual blocks.
3513 BasicBlock *TrueBB = TBA->getBasicBlock();
3514 BasicBlock *FalseBB = FBA->getBasicBlock();
3515
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003516 // Perform the actual simplification.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003517 return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(IBI, SI->getCondition(), TrueBB, FalseBB, 0,
3518 0);
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +00003519}
3520
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003521/// This is called when we find an icmp instruction
3522/// (a seteq/setne with a constant) as the only instruction in a
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003523/// block that ends with an uncond branch. We are looking for a very specific
3524/// pattern that occurs when "A == 1 || A == 2 || A == 3" gets simplified. In
3525/// this case, we merge the first two "or's of icmp" into a switch, but then the
3526/// default value goes to an uncond block with a seteq in it, we get something
3527/// like:
3528///
3529/// switch i8 %A, label %DEFAULT [ i8 1, label %end i8 2, label %end ]
3530/// DEFAULT:
3531/// %tmp = icmp eq i8 %A, 92
3532/// br label %end
3533/// end:
3534/// ... = phi i1 [ true, %entry ], [ %tmp, %DEFAULT ], [ true, %entry ]
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003535///
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003536/// We prefer to split the edge to 'end' so that there is a true/false entry to
3537/// the PHI, merging the third icmp into the switch.
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00003538bool SimplifyCFGOpt::tryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(
3539 ICmpInst *ICI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003540 BasicBlock *BB = ICI->getParent();
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00003541
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003542 // If the block has any PHIs in it or the icmp has multiple uses, it is too
3543 // complex.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003544 if (isa<PHINode>(BB->begin()) || !ICI->hasOneUse())
3545 return false;
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003546
3547 Value *V = ICI->getOperand(0);
3548 ConstantInt *Cst = cast<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1));
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003549
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003550 // The pattern we're looking for is where our only predecessor is a switch on
3551 // 'V' and this block is the default case for the switch. In this case we can
3552 // fold the compared value into the switch to simplify things.
3553 BasicBlock *Pred = BB->getSinglePredecessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003554 if (!Pred || !isa<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator()))
3555 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003556
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003557 SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator());
3558 if (SI->getCondition() != V)
3559 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003560
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003561 // If BB is reachable on a non-default case, then we simply know the value of
3562 // V in this block. Substitute it and constant fold the icmp instruction
3563 // away.
3564 if (SI->getDefaultDest() != BB) {
3565 ConstantInt *VVal = SI->findCaseDest(BB);
3566 assert(VVal && "Should have a unique destination value");
3567 ICI->setOperand(0, VVal);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003568
Daniel Berlin4d0fe642017-04-28 19:55:38 +00003569 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(ICI, {DL, ICI})) {
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003570 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003571 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3572 }
3573 // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00003574 return requestResimplify();
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003575 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003576
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003577 // Ok, the block is reachable from the default dest. If the constant we're
3578 // comparing exists in one of the other edges, then we can constant fold ICI
3579 // and zap it.
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003580 if (SI->findCaseValue(Cst) != SI->case_default()) {
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003581 Value *V;
3582 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
3583 V = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
3584 else
3585 V = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003586
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003587 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
3588 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3589 // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00003590 return requestResimplify();
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003591 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003592
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003593 // The use of the icmp has to be in the 'end' block, by the only PHI node in
3594 // the block.
3595 BasicBlock *SuccBlock = BB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00003596 PHINode *PHIUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(ICI->user_back());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003597 if (PHIUse == nullptr || PHIUse != &SuccBlock->front() ||
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003598 isa<PHINode>(++BasicBlock::iterator(PHIUse)))
3599 return false;
3600
3601 // If the icmp is a SETEQ, then the default dest gets false, the new edge gets
3602 // true in the PHI.
3603 Constant *DefaultCst = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003604 Constant *NewCst = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003605
3606 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
3607 std::swap(DefaultCst, NewCst);
3608
3609 // Replace ICI (which is used by the PHI for the default value) with true or
3610 // false depending on if it is EQ or NE.
3611 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(DefaultCst);
3612 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3613
3614 // Okay, the switch goes to this block on a default value. Add an edge from
3615 // the switch to the merge point on the compared value.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003616 BasicBlock *NewBB =
3617 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "switch.edge", BB->getParent(), BB);
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003618 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
3619 bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
3620 if (HasWeights) {
3621 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3622 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
3623 // Split weight for default case to case for "Cst".
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003624 Weights[0] = (Weights[0] + 1) >> 1;
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003625 Weights.push_back(Weights[0]);
3626
3627 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00003628 setBranchWeights(SI, MDWeights);
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003629 }
3630 }
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003631 SI->addCase(Cst, NewBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003632
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003633 // NewBB branches to the phi block, add the uncond branch and the phi entry.
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00003634 Builder.SetInsertPoint(NewBB);
3635 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(SI->getDebugLoc());
3636 Builder.CreateBr(SuccBlock);
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003637 PHIUse->addIncoming(NewCst, NewBB);
3638 return true;
3639}
3640
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003641/// The specified branch is a conditional branch.
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003642/// Check to see if it is branching on an or/and chain of icmp instructions, and
3643/// fold it into a switch instruction if so.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003644static bool SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
3645 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003646 Instruction *Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003647 if (!Cond)
3648 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003649
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003650 // Change br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F into a switch instruction.
3651 // If this is a bunch of seteq's or'd together, or if it's a bunch of
3652 // 'setne's and'ed together, collect them.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003653
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +00003654 // Try to gather values from a chain of and/or to be turned into a switch
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003655 ConstantComparesGatherer ConstantCompare(Cond, DL);
3656 // Unpack the result
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003657 SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> &Values = ConstantCompare.Vals;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003658 Value *CompVal = ConstantCompare.CompValue;
3659 unsigned UsedICmps = ConstantCompare.UsedICmps;
3660 Value *ExtraCase = ConstantCompare.Extra;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003661
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003662 // If we didn't have a multiply compared value, fail.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003663 if (!CompVal)
3664 return false;
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003665
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00003666 // Avoid turning single icmps into a switch.
3667 if (UsedICmps <= 1)
3668 return false;
3669
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003670 bool TrueWhenEqual = (Cond->getOpcode() == Instruction::Or);
3671
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003672 // There might be duplicate constants in the list, which the switch
3673 // instruction can't handle, remove them now.
3674 array_pod_sort(Values.begin(), Values.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
3675 Values.erase(std::unique(Values.begin(), Values.end()), Values.end());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003676
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003677 // If Extra was used, we require at least two switch values to do the
Sanjay Patel59661452015-09-10 15:14:34 +00003678 // transformation. A switch with one value is just a conditional branch.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003679 if (ExtraCase && Values.size() < 2)
3680 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003681
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00003682 // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
3683 // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
3684
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003685 // Figure out which block is which destination.
3686 BasicBlock *DefaultBB = BI->getSuccessor(1);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003687 BasicBlock *EdgeBB = BI->getSuccessor(0);
3688 if (!TrueWhenEqual)
3689 std::swap(DefaultBB, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003690
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003691 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003692
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00003693 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Converting 'icmp' chain with " << Values.size()
3694 << " cases into SWITCH. BB is:\n"
3695 << *BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003696
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003697 // If there are any extra values that couldn't be folded into the switch
3698 // then we evaluate them with an explicit branch first. Split the block
3699 // right before the condbr to handle it.
3700 if (ExtraCase) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003701 BasicBlock *NewBB =
3702 BB->splitBasicBlock(BI->getIterator(), "switch.early.test");
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003703 // Remove the uncond branch added to the old block.
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00003704 Instruction *OldTI = BB->getTerminator();
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003705 Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
3706
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00003707 if (TrueWhenEqual)
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003708 Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, EdgeBB, NewBB);
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00003709 else
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003710 Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, NewBB, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003711
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003712 OldTI->eraseFromParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003713
Chris Lattnercb570f82010-12-13 05:34:18 +00003714 // If there are PHI nodes in EdgeBB, then we need to add a new entry to them
3715 // for the edge we just added.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00003716 AddPredecessorToBlock(EdgeBB, BB, NewBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003717
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00003718 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain unhandled condition: " << *ExtraCase
3719 << "\nEXTRABB = " << *BB);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003720 BB = NewBB;
3721 }
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003722
3723 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003724 // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
3725 if (CompVal->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003726 CompVal = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(
3727 CompVal, DL.getIntPtrType(CompVal->getType()), "magicptr");
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003728 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003729
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003730 // Create the new switch instruction now.
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003731 SwitchInst *New = Builder.CreateSwitch(CompVal, DefaultBB, Values.size());
Devang Patelb849cd52011-05-17 23:29:05 +00003732
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003733 // Add all of the 'cases' to the switch instruction.
3734 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size(); i != e; ++i)
3735 New->addCase(Values[i], EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003736
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003737 // We added edges from PI to the EdgeBB. As such, if there were any
3738 // PHI nodes in EdgeBB, they need entries to be added corresponding to
3739 // the number of edges added.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003740 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = EdgeBB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003741 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
3742 Value *InVal = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003743 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size() - 1; i != e; ++i)
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003744 PN->addIncoming(InVal, BB);
3745 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003746
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003747 // Erase the old branch instruction.
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00003748 EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(BI);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003749
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00003750 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain result is:\n" << *BB << '\n');
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003751 return true;
3752}
3753
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003754bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003755 if (isa<PHINode>(RI->getValue()))
3756 return SimplifyCommonResume(RI);
3757 else if (isa<LandingPadInst>(RI->getParent()->getFirstNonPHI()) &&
3758 RI->getValue() == RI->getParent()->getFirstNonPHI())
3759 // The resume must unwind the exception that caused control to branch here.
3760 return SimplifySingleResume(RI);
Chen Li509ff212016-01-11 19:20:53 +00003761
3762 return false;
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003763}
3764
3765// Simplify resume that is shared by several landing pads (phi of landing pad).
3766bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCommonResume(ResumeInst *RI) {
3767 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
3768
3769 // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug intrinsics
3770 // between the phi of landing pads (RI->getValue()) and resume instruction.
3771 BasicBlock::iterator I = cast<Instruction>(RI->getValue())->getIterator(),
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003772 E = RI->getIterator();
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003773 while (++I != E)
3774 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
3775 return false;
3776
Mandeep Singh Grang799a2ed2017-04-24 19:20:45 +00003777 SmallSetVector<BasicBlock *, 4> TrivialUnwindBlocks;
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003778 auto *PhiLPInst = cast<PHINode>(RI->getValue());
3779
3780 // Check incoming blocks to see if any of them are trivial.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003781 for (unsigned Idx = 0, End = PhiLPInst->getNumIncomingValues(); Idx != End;
3782 Idx++) {
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003783 auto *IncomingBB = PhiLPInst->getIncomingBlock(Idx);
3784 auto *IncomingValue = PhiLPInst->getIncomingValue(Idx);
3785
3786 // If the block has other successors, we can not delete it because
3787 // it has other dependents.
3788 if (IncomingBB->getUniqueSuccessor() != BB)
3789 continue;
3790
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003791 auto *LandingPad = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(IncomingBB->getFirstNonPHI());
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003792 // Not the landing pad that caused the control to branch here.
3793 if (IncomingValue != LandingPad)
3794 continue;
3795
3796 bool isTrivial = true;
3797
3798 I = IncomingBB->getFirstNonPHI()->getIterator();
3799 E = IncomingBB->getTerminator()->getIterator();
3800 while (++I != E)
3801 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
3802 isTrivial = false;
3803 break;
3804 }
3805
3806 if (isTrivial)
3807 TrivialUnwindBlocks.insert(IncomingBB);
3808 }
3809
3810 // If no trivial unwind blocks, don't do any simplifications.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003811 if (TrivialUnwindBlocks.empty())
3812 return false;
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003813
3814 // Turn all invokes that unwind here into calls.
3815 for (auto *TrivialBB : TrivialUnwindBlocks) {
3816 // Blocks that will be simplified should be removed from the phi node.
3817 // Note there could be multiple edges to the resume block, and we need
3818 // to remove them all.
3819 while (PhiLPInst->getBasicBlockIndex(TrivialBB) != -1)
3820 BB->removePredecessor(TrivialBB, true);
3821
3822 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(TrivialBB), PE = pred_end(TrivialBB);
3823 PI != PE;) {
3824 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI++;
3825 removeUnwindEdge(Pred);
3826 }
3827
3828 // In each SimplifyCFG run, only the current processed block can be erased.
3829 // Otherwise, it will break the iteration of SimplifyCFG pass. So instead
3830 // of erasing TrivialBB, we only remove the branch to the common resume
3831 // block so that we can later erase the resume block since it has no
3832 // predecessors.
3833 TrivialBB->getTerminator()->eraseFromParent();
3834 new UnreachableInst(RI->getContext(), TrivialBB);
3835 }
3836
3837 // Delete the resume block if all its predecessors have been removed.
3838 if (pred_empty(BB))
3839 BB->eraseFromParent();
3840
3841 return !TrivialUnwindBlocks.empty();
3842}
3843
3844// Simplify resume that is only used by a single (non-phi) landing pad.
3845bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifySingleResume(ResumeInst *RI) {
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003846 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
3847 LandingPadInst *LPInst = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(BB->getFirstNonPHI());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003848 assert(RI->getValue() == LPInst &&
3849 "Resume must unwind the exception that caused control to here");
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003850
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003851 // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug intrinsics.
3852 BasicBlock::iterator I = LPInst->getIterator(), E = RI->getIterator();
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003853 while (++I != E)
3854 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
3855 return false;
3856
Chen Lic6e28782015-10-22 20:48:38 +00003857 // Turn all invokes that unwind here into calls and delete the basic block.
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003858 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE;) {
3859 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI++;
3860 removeUnwindEdge(Pred);
Chen Lic6e28782015-10-22 20:48:38 +00003861 }
3862
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003863 // The landingpad is now unreachable. Zap it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003864 if (LoopHeaders)
3865 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Chijun Simae8263f32018-08-15 13:56:21 +00003866 BB->eraseFromParent();
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003867 return true;
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003868}
3869
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00003870static bool removeEmptyCleanup(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003871 // If this is a trivial cleanup pad that executes no instructions, it can be
3872 // eliminated. If the cleanup pad continues to the caller, any predecessor
3873 // that is an EH pad will be updated to continue to the caller and any
3874 // predecessor that terminates with an invoke instruction will have its invoke
3875 // instruction converted to a call instruction. If the cleanup pad being
3876 // simplified does not continue to the caller, each predecessor will be
3877 // updated to continue to the unwind destination of the cleanup pad being
3878 // simplified.
3879 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003880 CleanupPadInst *CPInst = RI->getCleanupPad();
3881 if (CPInst->getParent() != BB)
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003882 // This isn't an empty cleanup.
3883 return false;
3884
David Majnemer2482e1c2016-06-04 23:50:03 +00003885 // We cannot kill the pad if it has multiple uses. This typically arises
3886 // from unreachable basic blocks.
3887 if (!CPInst->hasOneUse())
3888 return false;
3889
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003890 // Check that there are no other instructions except for benign intrinsics.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003891 BasicBlock::iterator I = CPInst->getIterator(), E = RI->getIterator();
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003892 while (++I != E) {
3893 auto *II = dyn_cast<IntrinsicInst>(I);
3894 if (!II)
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003895 return false;
3896
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003897 Intrinsic::ID IntrinsicID = II->getIntrinsicID();
3898 switch (IntrinsicID) {
3899 case Intrinsic::dbg_declare:
3900 case Intrinsic::dbg_value:
Shiva Chen2c864552018-05-09 02:40:45 +00003901 case Intrinsic::dbg_label:
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003902 case Intrinsic::lifetime_end:
3903 break;
3904 default:
3905 return false;
3906 }
3907 }
3908
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003909 // If the cleanup return we are simplifying unwinds to the caller, this will
3910 // set UnwindDest to nullptr.
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003911 BasicBlock *UnwindDest = RI->getUnwindDest();
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003912 Instruction *DestEHPad = UnwindDest ? UnwindDest->getFirstNonPHI() : nullptr;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003913
3914 // We're about to remove BB from the control flow. Before we do, sink any
3915 // PHINodes into the unwind destination. Doing this before changing the
3916 // control flow avoids some potentially slow checks, since we can currently
3917 // be certain that UnwindDest and BB have no common predecessors (since they
3918 // are both EH pads).
3919 if (UnwindDest) {
3920 // First, go through the PHI nodes in UnwindDest and update any nodes that
3921 // reference the block we are removing
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003922 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = UnwindDest->begin(),
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003923 IE = DestEHPad->getIterator();
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003924 I != IE; ++I) {
3925 PHINode *DestPN = cast<PHINode>(I);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003926
Andrew Kaylor2a9a6d82015-09-05 01:00:51 +00003927 int Idx = DestPN->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003928 // Since BB unwinds to UnwindDest, it has to be in the PHI node.
Craig Topper02a55d72015-09-05 04:49:44 +00003929 assert(Idx != -1);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003930 // This PHI node has an incoming value that corresponds to a control
3931 // path through the cleanup pad we are removing. If the incoming
3932 // value is in the cleanup pad, it must be a PHINode (because we
3933 // verified above that the block is otherwise empty). Otherwise, the
3934 // value is either a constant or a value that dominates the cleanup
3935 // pad being removed.
3936 //
3937 // Because BB and UnwindDest are both EH pads, all of their
3938 // predecessors must unwind to these blocks, and since no instruction
3939 // can have multiple unwind destinations, there will be no overlap in
3940 // incoming blocks between SrcPN and DestPN.
3941 Value *SrcVal = DestPN->getIncomingValue(Idx);
3942 PHINode *SrcPN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(SrcVal);
3943
3944 // Remove the entry for the block we are deleting.
3945 DestPN->removeIncomingValue(Idx, false);
3946
3947 if (SrcPN && SrcPN->getParent() == BB) {
3948 // If the incoming value was a PHI node in the cleanup pad we are
3949 // removing, we need to merge that PHI node's incoming values into
3950 // DestPN.
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003951 for (unsigned SrcIdx = 0, SrcE = SrcPN->getNumIncomingValues();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003952 SrcIdx != SrcE; ++SrcIdx) {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003953 DestPN->addIncoming(SrcPN->getIncomingValue(SrcIdx),
3954 SrcPN->getIncomingBlock(SrcIdx));
3955 }
3956 } else {
3957 // Otherwise, the incoming value came from above BB and
3958 // so we can just reuse it. We must associate all of BB's
3959 // predecessors with this value.
3960 for (auto *pred : predecessors(BB)) {
3961 DestPN->addIncoming(SrcVal, pred);
3962 }
3963 }
3964 }
3965
3966 // Sink any remaining PHI nodes directly into UnwindDest.
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003967 Instruction *InsertPt = DestEHPad;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003968 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(),
3969 IE = BB->getFirstNonPHI()->getIterator();
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003970 I != IE;) {
3971 // The iterator must be incremented here because the instructions are
3972 // being moved to another block.
3973 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(I++);
3974 if (PN->use_empty())
3975 // If the PHI node has no uses, just leave it. It will be erased
3976 // when we erase BB below.
3977 continue;
3978
3979 // Otherwise, sink this PHI node into UnwindDest.
3980 // Any predecessors to UnwindDest which are not already represented
3981 // must be back edges which inherit the value from the path through
3982 // BB. In this case, the PHI value must reference itself.
3983 for (auto *pred : predecessors(UnwindDest))
3984 if (pred != BB)
3985 PN->addIncoming(PN, pred);
3986 PN->moveBefore(InsertPt);
3987 }
3988 }
3989
3990 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE;) {
3991 // The iterator must be updated here because we are removing this pred.
3992 BasicBlock *PredBB = *PI++;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003993 if (UnwindDest == nullptr) {
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00003994 removeUnwindEdge(PredBB);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003995 } else {
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00003996 Instruction *TI = PredBB->getTerminator();
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00003997 TI->replaceUsesOfWith(BB, UnwindDest);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003998 }
3999 }
4000
4001 // The cleanup pad is now unreachable. Zap it.
4002 BB->eraseFromParent();
4003 return true;
4004}
4005
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00004006// Try to merge two cleanuppads together.
4007static bool mergeCleanupPad(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
4008 // Skip any cleanuprets which unwind to caller, there is nothing to merge
4009 // with.
4010 BasicBlock *UnwindDest = RI->getUnwindDest();
4011 if (!UnwindDest)
4012 return false;
4013
4014 // This cleanupret isn't the only predecessor of this cleanuppad, it wouldn't
4015 // be safe to merge without code duplication.
4016 if (UnwindDest->getSinglePredecessor() != RI->getParent())
4017 return false;
4018
4019 // Verify that our cleanuppad's unwind destination is another cleanuppad.
4020 auto *SuccessorCleanupPad = dyn_cast<CleanupPadInst>(&UnwindDest->front());
4021 if (!SuccessorCleanupPad)
4022 return false;
4023
4024 CleanupPadInst *PredecessorCleanupPad = RI->getCleanupPad();
4025 // Replace any uses of the successor cleanupad with the predecessor pad
4026 // The only cleanuppad uses should be this cleanupret, it's cleanupret and
4027 // funclet bundle operands.
4028 SuccessorCleanupPad->replaceAllUsesWith(PredecessorCleanupPad);
4029 // Remove the old cleanuppad.
4030 SuccessorCleanupPad->eraseFromParent();
4031 // Now, we simply replace the cleanupret with a branch to the unwind
4032 // destination.
4033 BranchInst::Create(UnwindDest, RI->getParent());
4034 RI->eraseFromParent();
4035
4036 return true;
4037}
4038
4039bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCleanupReturn(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
David Majnemeree0cbbb2016-02-24 17:30:48 +00004040 // It is possible to transiantly have an undef cleanuppad operand because we
4041 // have deleted some, but not all, dead blocks.
4042 // Eventually, this block will be deleted.
4043 if (isa<UndefValue>(RI->getOperand(0)))
4044 return false;
4045
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00004046 if (mergeCleanupPad(RI))
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00004047 return true;
4048
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00004049 if (removeEmptyCleanup(RI))
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00004050 return true;
4051
4052 return false;
4053}
4054
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00004055bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004056 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004057 if (!BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
4058 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004059
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004060 // Find predecessors that end with branches.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004061 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> UncondBranchPreds;
4062 SmallVector<BranchInst *, 8> CondBranchPreds;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00004063 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) {
4064 BasicBlock *P = *PI;
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00004065 Instruction *PTI = P->getTerminator();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004066 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PTI)) {
4067 if (BI->isUnconditional())
4068 UncondBranchPreds.push_back(P);
4069 else
4070 CondBranchPreds.push_back(BI);
4071 }
4072 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004073
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004074 // If we found some, do the transformation!
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +00004075 if (!UncondBranchPreds.empty() && DupRet) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004076 while (!UncondBranchPreds.empty()) {
4077 BasicBlock *Pred = UncondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00004078 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING: " << *BB
4079 << "INTO UNCOND BRANCH PRED: " << *Pred);
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +00004080 (void)FoldReturnIntoUncondBranch(RI, BB, Pred);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004081 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004082
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004083 // If we eliminated all predecessors of the block, delete the block now.
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00004084 if (pred_empty(BB)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004085 // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004086 if (LoopHeaders)
4087 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Chijun Simae8263f32018-08-15 13:56:21 +00004088 BB->eraseFromParent();
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00004089 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004090
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004091 return true;
4092 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004093
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004094 // Check out all of the conditional branches going to this return
4095 // instruction. If any of them just select between returns, change the
4096 // branch itself into a select/return pair.
4097 while (!CondBranchPreds.empty()) {
4098 BranchInst *BI = CondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004099
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004100 // Check to see if the non-BB successor is also a return block.
4101 if (isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator()) &&
4102 isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator()) &&
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00004103 SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BI, Builder))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004104 return true;
4105 }
4106 return false;
4107}
4108
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004109bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI) {
4110 BasicBlock *BB = UI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004111
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004112 bool Changed = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004113
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004114 // If there are any instructions immediately before the unreachable that can
4115 // be removed, do so.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004116 while (UI->getIterator() != BB->begin()) {
4117 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = UI->getIterator();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004118 --BBI;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004119 // Do not delete instructions that can have side effects which might cause
4120 // the unreachable to not be reachable; specifically, calls and volatile
4121 // operations may have this effect.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004122 if (isa<CallInst>(BBI) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
4123 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004124
4125 if (BBI->mayHaveSideEffects()) {
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004126 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004127 if (SI->isVolatile())
4128 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004129 } else if (auto *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004130 if (LI->isVolatile())
4131 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004132 } else if (auto *RMWI = dyn_cast<AtomicRMWInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004133 if (RMWI->isVolatile())
4134 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004135 } else if (auto *CXI = dyn_cast<AtomicCmpXchgInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004136 if (CXI->isVolatile())
4137 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004138 } else if (isa<CatchPadInst>(BBI)) {
4139 // A catchpad may invoke exception object constructors and such, which
4140 // in some languages can be arbitrary code, so be conservative by
4141 // default.
4142 // For CoreCLR, it just involves a type test, so can be removed.
4143 if (classifyEHPersonality(BB->getParent()->getPersonalityFn()) !=
4144 EHPersonality::CoreCLR)
4145 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004146 } else if (!isa<FenceInst>(BBI) && !isa<VAArgInst>(BBI) &&
4147 !isa<LandingPadInst>(BBI)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004148 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004149 }
Bill Wendling55d875f2011-08-16 20:41:17 +00004150 // Note that deleting LandingPad's here is in fact okay, although it
4151 // involves a bit of subtle reasoning. If this inst is a LandingPad,
4152 // all the predecessors of this block will be the unwind edges of Invokes,
4153 // and we can therefore guarantee this block will be erased.
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004154 }
4155
Eli Friedmanaac35b32011-03-09 00:48:33 +00004156 // Delete this instruction (any uses are guaranteed to be dead)
4157 if (!BBI->use_empty())
4158 BBI->replaceAllUsesWith(UndefValue::get(BBI->getType()));
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00004159 BBI->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004160 Changed = true;
4161 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004162
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004163 // If the unreachable instruction is the first in the block, take a gander
4164 // at all of the predecessors of this instruction, and simplify them.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004165 if (&BB->front() != UI)
4166 return Changed;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004167
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004168 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004169 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Preds.size(); i != e; ++i) {
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00004170 Instruction *TI = Preds[i]->getTerminator();
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00004171 IRBuilder<> Builder(TI);
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004172 if (auto *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004173 if (BI->isUnconditional()) {
4174 if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
4175 new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI);
4176 TI->eraseFromParent();
4177 Changed = true;
4178 }
4179 } else {
4180 if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00004181 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(1));
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00004182 EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004183 } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) {
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00004184 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0));
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00004185 EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004186 Changed = true;
4187 }
4188 }
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004189 } else if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
Chandler Carruth0d256c02017-03-26 02:49:23 +00004190 for (auto i = SI->case_begin(), e = SI->case_end(); i != e;) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004191 if (i->getCaseSuccessor() != BB) {
Chandler Carruth0d256c02017-03-26 02:49:23 +00004192 ++i;
4193 continue;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004194 }
Chandler Carruth0d256c02017-03-26 02:49:23 +00004195 BB->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
4196 i = SI->removeCase(i);
4197 e = SI->case_end();
4198 Changed = true;
4199 }
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004200 } else if (auto *II = dyn_cast<InvokeInst>(TI)) {
4201 if (II->getUnwindDest() == BB) {
4202 removeUnwindEdge(TI->getParent());
4203 Changed = true;
4204 }
4205 } else if (auto *CSI = dyn_cast<CatchSwitchInst>(TI)) {
4206 if (CSI->getUnwindDest() == BB) {
4207 removeUnwindEdge(TI->getParent());
4208 Changed = true;
4209 continue;
4210 }
4211
4212 for (CatchSwitchInst::handler_iterator I = CSI->handler_begin(),
4213 E = CSI->handler_end();
4214 I != E; ++I) {
4215 if (*I == BB) {
4216 CSI->removeHandler(I);
4217 --I;
4218 --E;
4219 Changed = true;
4220 }
4221 }
4222 if (CSI->getNumHandlers() == 0) {
4223 BasicBlock *CatchSwitchBB = CSI->getParent();
4224 if (CSI->hasUnwindDest()) {
4225 // Redirect preds to the unwind dest
4226 CatchSwitchBB->replaceAllUsesWith(CSI->getUnwindDest());
4227 } else {
4228 // Rewrite all preds to unwind to caller (or from invoke to call).
4229 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> EHPreds(predecessors(CatchSwitchBB));
4230 for (BasicBlock *EHPred : EHPreds)
4231 removeUnwindEdge(EHPred);
4232 }
4233 // The catchswitch is no longer reachable.
4234 new UnreachableInst(CSI->getContext(), CSI);
4235 CSI->eraseFromParent();
4236 Changed = true;
4237 }
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00004238 } else if (isa<CleanupReturnInst>(TI)) {
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00004239 new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI);
4240 TI->eraseFromParent();
4241 Changed = true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004242 }
4243 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004244
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004245 // If this block is now dead, remove it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004246 if (pred_empty(BB) && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004247 // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004248 if (LoopHeaders)
4249 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Chijun Simae8263f32018-08-15 13:56:21 +00004250 BB->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004251 return true;
4252 }
4253
4254 return Changed;
4255}
4256
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004257static bool CasesAreContiguous(SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> &Cases) {
4258 assert(Cases.size() >= 1);
4259
4260 array_pod_sort(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
4261 for (size_t I = 1, E = Cases.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4262 if (Cases[I - 1]->getValue() != Cases[I]->getValue() + 1)
4263 return false;
4264 }
4265 return true;
4266}
4267
4268/// Turn a switch with two reachable destinations into an integer range
4269/// comparison and branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00004270static bool TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00004271 assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004272
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004273 bool HasDefault =
4274 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00004275
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004276 // Partition the cases into two sets with different destinations.
4277 BasicBlock *DestA = HasDefault ? SI->getDefaultDest() : nullptr;
4278 BasicBlock *DestB = nullptr;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004279 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 16> CasesA;
4280 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 16> CasesB;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004281
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004282 for (auto Case : SI->cases()) {
4283 BasicBlock *Dest = Case.getCaseSuccessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004284 if (!DestA)
4285 DestA = Dest;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004286 if (Dest == DestA) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004287 CasesA.push_back(Case.getCaseValue());
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004288 continue;
4289 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004290 if (!DestB)
4291 DestB = Dest;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004292 if (Dest == DestB) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004293 CasesB.push_back(Case.getCaseValue());
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004294 continue;
4295 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004296 return false; // More than two destinations.
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00004297 }
4298
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004299 assert(DestA && DestB &&
4300 "Single-destination switch should have been folded.");
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004301 assert(DestA != DestB);
4302 assert(DestB != SI->getDefaultDest());
4303 assert(!CasesB.empty() && "There must be non-default cases.");
4304 assert(!CasesA.empty() || HasDefault);
4305
4306 // Figure out if one of the sets of cases form a contiguous range.
4307 SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> *ContiguousCases = nullptr;
4308 BasicBlock *ContiguousDest = nullptr;
4309 BasicBlock *OtherDest = nullptr;
4310 if (!CasesA.empty() && CasesAreContiguous(CasesA)) {
4311 ContiguousCases = &CasesA;
4312 ContiguousDest = DestA;
4313 OtherDest = DestB;
4314 } else if (CasesAreContiguous(CasesB)) {
4315 ContiguousCases = &CasesB;
4316 ContiguousDest = DestB;
4317 OtherDest = DestA;
4318 } else
4319 return false;
4320
4321 // Start building the compare and branch.
4322
4323 Constant *Offset = ConstantExpr::getNeg(ContiguousCases->back());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004324 Constant *NumCases =
4325 ConstantInt::get(Offset->getType(), ContiguousCases->size());
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004326
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00004327 Value *Sub = SI->getCondition();
4328 if (!Offset->isNullValue())
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004329 Sub = Builder.CreateAdd(Sub, Offset, Sub->getName() + ".off");
4330
Hans Wennborgc9e1d992013-04-16 08:35:36 +00004331 Value *Cmp;
4332 // If NumCases overflowed, then all possible values jump to the successor.
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004333 if (NumCases->isNullValue() && !ContiguousCases->empty())
Hans Wennborgc9e1d992013-04-16 08:35:36 +00004334 Cmp = ConstantInt::getTrue(SI->getContext());
4335 else
4336 Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(Sub, NumCases, "switch");
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004337 BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, ContiguousDest, OtherDest);
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004338
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004339 // Update weight for the newly-created conditional branch.
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004340 if (HasBranchWeights(SI)) {
4341 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004342 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
4343 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004344 uint64_t TrueWeight = 0;
4345 uint64_t FalseWeight = 0;
4346 for (size_t I = 0, E = Weights.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4347 if (SI->getSuccessor(I) == ContiguousDest)
4348 TrueWeight += Weights[I];
4349 else
4350 FalseWeight += Weights[I];
4351 }
4352 while (TrueWeight > UINT32_MAX || FalseWeight > UINT32_MAX) {
4353 TrueWeight /= 2;
4354 FalseWeight /= 2;
4355 }
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00004356 setBranchWeights(NewBI, TrueWeight, FalseWeight);
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004357 }
4358 }
4359
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004360 // Prune obsolete incoming values off the successors' PHI nodes.
4361 for (auto BBI = ContiguousDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
4362 unsigned PreviousEdges = ContiguousCases->size();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004363 if (ContiguousDest == SI->getDefaultDest())
4364 ++PreviousEdges;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004365 for (unsigned I = 0, E = PreviousEdges - 1; I != E; ++I)
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004366 cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
4367 }
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004368 for (auto BBI = OtherDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
4369 unsigned PreviousEdges = SI->getNumCases() - ContiguousCases->size();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004370 if (OtherDest == SI->getDefaultDest())
4371 ++PreviousEdges;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004372 for (unsigned I = 0, E = PreviousEdges - 1; I != E; ++I)
4373 cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
4374 }
4375
4376 // Drop the switch.
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004377 SI->eraseFromParent();
4378
4379 return true;
4380}
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004381
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004382/// Compute masked bits for the condition of a switch
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004383/// and use it to remove dead cases.
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00004384static bool eliminateDeadSwitchCases(SwitchInst *SI, AssumptionCache *AC,
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00004385 const DataLayout &DL) {
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004386 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
Matt Arsenault8227b9f2013-09-06 00:37:24 +00004387 unsigned Bits = Cond->getType()->getIntegerBitWidth();
Craig Topper8205a1a2017-05-24 16:53:07 +00004388 KnownBits Known = computeKnownBits(Cond, DL, 0, AC, SI);
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004389
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004390 // We can also eliminate cases by determining that their values are outside of
4391 // the limited range of the condition based on how many significant (non-sign)
4392 // bits are in the condition value.
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00004393 unsigned ExtraSignBits = ComputeNumSignBits(Cond, DL, 0, AC, SI) - 1;
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004394 unsigned MaxSignificantBitsInCond = Bits - ExtraSignBits;
4395
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004396 // Gather dead cases.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004397 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 8> DeadCases;
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00004398 for (auto &Case : SI->cases()) {
Craig Toppere777fed2017-05-22 00:49:35 +00004399 const APInt &CaseVal = Case.getCaseValue()->getValue();
Craig Topperb45eabc2017-04-26 16:39:58 +00004400 if (Known.Zero.intersects(CaseVal) || !Known.One.isSubsetOf(CaseVal) ||
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004401 (CaseVal.getMinSignedBits() > MaxSignificantBitsInCond)) {
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00004402 DeadCases.push_back(Case.getCaseValue());
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00004403 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch case " << CaseVal
4404 << " is dead.\n");
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004405 }
4406 }
4407
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004408 // If we can prove that the cases must cover all possible values, the
4409 // default destination becomes dead and we can remove it. If we know some
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00004410 // of the bits in the value, we can use that to more precisely compute the
4411 // number of possible unique case values.
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00004412 bool HasDefault =
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004413 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
4414 const unsigned NumUnknownBits =
Craig Topperb45eabc2017-04-26 16:39:58 +00004415 Bits - (Known.Zero | Known.One).countPopulation();
Filipe Cabecinhas48b090a2015-09-10 22:34:39 +00004416 assert(NumUnknownBits <= Bits);
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00004417 if (HasDefault && DeadCases.empty() &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004418 NumUnknownBits < 64 /* avoid overflow */ &&
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00004419 SI->getNumCases() == (1ULL << NumUnknownBits)) {
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00004420 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch default is dead.\n");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004421 BasicBlock *NewDefault =
4422 SplitBlockPredecessors(SI->getDefaultDest(), SI->getParent(), "");
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004423 SI->setDefaultDest(&*NewDefault);
4424 SplitBlock(&*NewDefault, &NewDefault->front());
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00004425 auto *OldTI = NewDefault->getTerminator();
4426 new UnreachableInst(SI->getContext(), OldTI);
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00004427 EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(OldTI);
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00004428 return true;
4429 }
4430
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004431 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
4432 bool HasWeight = HasBranchWeights(SI);
4433 if (HasWeight) {
4434 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
4435 HasWeight = (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases());
4436 }
4437
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004438 // Remove dead cases from the switch.
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00004439 for (ConstantInt *DeadCase : DeadCases) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004440 SwitchInst::CaseIt CaseI = SI->findCaseValue(DeadCase);
4441 assert(CaseI != SI->case_default() &&
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00004442 "Case was not found. Probably mistake in DeadCases forming.");
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004443 if (HasWeight) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004444 std::swap(Weights[CaseI->getCaseIndex() + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004445 Weights.pop_back();
4446 }
4447
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004448 // Prune unused values from PHI nodes.
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004449 CaseI->getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
4450 SI->removeCase(CaseI);
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004451 }
Justin Bogner0ba3f212013-12-20 08:21:30 +00004452 if (HasWeight && Weights.size() >= 2) {
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004453 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00004454 setBranchWeights(SI, MDWeights);
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004455 }
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004456
4457 return !DeadCases.empty();
4458}
4459
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004460/// If BB would be eligible for simplification by
4461/// TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock (i.e. it is empty and terminated
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004462/// by an unconditional branch), look at the phi node for BB in the successor
4463/// block and see if the incoming value is equal to CaseValue. If so, return
4464/// the phi node, and set PhiIndex to BB's index in the phi node.
4465static PHINode *FindPHIForConditionForwarding(ConstantInt *CaseValue,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004466 BasicBlock *BB, int *PhiIndex) {
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004467 if (BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg() != BB->getTerminator())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004468 return nullptr; // BB must be empty to be a candidate for simplification.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004469 if (!BB->getSinglePredecessor())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004470 return nullptr; // BB must be dominated by the switch.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004471
4472 BranchInst *Branch = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
4473 if (!Branch || !Branch->isUnconditional())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004474 return nullptr; // Terminator must be unconditional branch.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004475
4476 BasicBlock *Succ = Branch->getSuccessor(0);
4477
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00004478 for (PHINode &PHI : Succ->phis()) {
4479 int Idx = PHI.getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004480 assert(Idx >= 0 && "PHI has no entry for predecessor?");
4481
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00004482 Value *InValue = PHI.getIncomingValue(Idx);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004483 if (InValue != CaseValue)
4484 continue;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004485
4486 *PhiIndex = Idx;
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00004487 return &PHI;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004488 }
4489
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004490 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004491}
4492
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004493/// Try to forward the condition of a switch instruction to a phi node
4494/// dominated by the switch, if that would mean that some of the destination
Sanjay Patel30f30d32017-10-15 14:43:39 +00004495/// blocks of the switch can be folded away. Return true if a change is made.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004496static bool ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SwitchInst *SI) {
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00004497 using ForwardingNodesMap = DenseMap<PHINode *, SmallVector<int, 4>>;
4498
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004499 ForwardingNodesMap ForwardingNodes;
Sanjay Patel24226502017-10-22 16:51:03 +00004500 BasicBlock *SwitchBlock = SI->getParent();
4501 bool Changed = false;
Sanjay Patel30f30d32017-10-15 14:43:39 +00004502 for (auto &Case : SI->cases()) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004503 ConstantInt *CaseValue = Case.getCaseValue();
4504 BasicBlock *CaseDest = Case.getCaseSuccessor();
Sanjay Patel24226502017-10-22 16:51:03 +00004505
4506 // Replace phi operands in successor blocks that are using the constant case
4507 // value rather than the switch condition variable:
4508 // switchbb:
4509 // switch i32 %x, label %default [
4510 // i32 17, label %succ
4511 // ...
4512 // succ:
4513 // %r = phi i32 ... [ 17, %switchbb ] ...
4514 // -->
4515 // %r = phi i32 ... [ %x, %switchbb ] ...
4516
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00004517 for (PHINode &Phi : CaseDest->phis()) {
Sanjay Patel24226502017-10-22 16:51:03 +00004518 // This only works if there is exactly 1 incoming edge from the switch to
4519 // a phi. If there is >1, that means multiple cases of the switch map to 1
4520 // value in the phi, and that phi value is not the switch condition. Thus,
4521 // this transform would not make sense (the phi would be invalid because
4522 // a phi can't have different incoming values from the same block).
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00004523 int SwitchBBIdx = Phi.getBasicBlockIndex(SwitchBlock);
4524 if (Phi.getIncomingValue(SwitchBBIdx) == CaseValue &&
4525 count(Phi.blocks(), SwitchBlock) == 1) {
4526 Phi.setIncomingValue(SwitchBBIdx, SI->getCondition());
Sanjay Patel24226502017-10-22 16:51:03 +00004527 Changed = true;
4528 }
4529 }
4530
4531 // Collect phi nodes that are indirectly using this switch's case constants.
Sanjay Patel30f30d32017-10-15 14:43:39 +00004532 int PhiIdx;
4533 if (auto *Phi = FindPHIForConditionForwarding(CaseValue, CaseDest, &PhiIdx))
4534 ForwardingNodes[Phi].push_back(PhiIdx);
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004535 }
4536
Sanjay Patel30f30d32017-10-15 14:43:39 +00004537 for (auto &ForwardingNode : ForwardingNodes) {
4538 PHINode *Phi = ForwardingNode.first;
4539 SmallVectorImpl<int> &Indexes = ForwardingNode.second;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004540 if (Indexes.size() < 2)
4541 continue;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004542
Sanjay Patel30f30d32017-10-15 14:43:39 +00004543 for (int Index : Indexes)
4544 Phi->setIncomingValue(Index, SI->getCondition());
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004545 Changed = true;
4546 }
4547
4548 return Changed;
4549}
4550
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004551/// Return true if the backend will be able to handle
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004552/// initializing an array of constants like C.
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004553static bool ValidLookupTableConstant(Constant *C, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Hans Wennborg4dc89512014-06-20 00:38:12 +00004554 if (C->isThreadDependent())
4555 return false;
4556 if (C->isDLLImportDependent())
4557 return false;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004558
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004559 if (!isa<ConstantFP>(C) && !isa<ConstantInt>(C) &&
4560 !isa<ConstantPointerNull>(C) && !isa<GlobalValue>(C) &&
4561 !isa<UndefValue>(C) && !isa<ConstantExpr>(C))
4562 return false;
Hans Wennborgb03ebfb2014-06-26 00:30:52 +00004563
Oliver Stannardfe4432b2016-10-17 12:00:24 +00004564 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(C)) {
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004565 if (!CE->isGEPWithNoNotionalOverIndexing())
4566 return false;
Oliver Stannardfe4432b2016-10-17 12:00:24 +00004567 if (!ValidLookupTableConstant(CE->getOperand(0), TTI))
4568 return false;
4569 }
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004570
4571 if (!TTI.shouldBuildLookupTablesForConstant(C))
4572 return false;
4573
4574 return true;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004575}
4576
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004577/// If V is a Constant, return it. Otherwise, try to look up
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004578/// its constant value in ConstantPool, returning 0 if it's not there.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004579static Constant *
4580LookupConstant(Value *V,
4581 const SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> &ConstantPool) {
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004582 if (Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V))
4583 return C;
4584 return ConstantPool.lookup(V);
4585}
4586
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004587/// Try to fold instruction I into a constant. This works for
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004588/// simple instructions such as binary operations where both operands are
4589/// constant or can be replaced by constants from the ConstantPool. Returns the
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004590/// resulting constant on success, 0 otherwise.
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004591static Constant *
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004592ConstantFold(Instruction *I, const DataLayout &DL,
4593 const SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> &ConstantPool) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004594 if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(I)) {
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004595 Constant *A = LookupConstant(Select->getCondition(), ConstantPool);
4596 if (!A)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004597 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004598 if (A->isAllOnesValue())
4599 return LookupConstant(Select->getTrueValue(), ConstantPool);
4600 if (A->isNullValue())
4601 return LookupConstant(Select->getFalseValue(), ConstantPool);
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004602 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004603 }
4604
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004605 SmallVector<Constant *, 4> COps;
4606 for (unsigned N = 0, E = I->getNumOperands(); N != E; ++N) {
4607 if (Constant *A = LookupConstant(I->getOperand(N), ConstantPool))
4608 COps.push_back(A);
4609 else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004610 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004611 }
4612
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004613 if (CmpInst *Cmp = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(I)) {
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004614 return ConstantFoldCompareInstOperands(Cmp->getPredicate(), COps[0],
4615 COps[1], DL);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004616 }
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004617
Manuel Jacobe9024592016-01-21 06:33:22 +00004618 return ConstantFoldInstOperands(I, COps, DL);
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004619}
4620
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004621/// Try to determine the resulting constant values in phi nodes
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004622/// at the common destination basic block, *CommonDest, for one of the case
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004623/// destionations CaseDest corresponding to value CaseVal (0 for the default
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004624/// case), of a switch instruction SI.
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00004625static bool
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004626GetCaseResults(SwitchInst *SI, ConstantInt *CaseVal, BasicBlock *CaseDest,
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00004627 BasicBlock **CommonDest,
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00004628 SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>> &Res,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004629 const DataLayout &DL, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004630 // The block from which we enter the common destination.
4631 BasicBlock *Pred = SI->getParent();
4632
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004633 // If CaseDest is empty except for some side-effect free instructions through
4634 // which we can constant-propagate the CaseVal, continue to its successor.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004635 SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> ConstantPool;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004636 ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(SI->getCondition(), CaseVal));
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00004637 for (Instruction &I :CaseDest->instructionsWithoutDebug()) {
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00004638 if (I.isTerminator()) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004639 // If the terminator is a simple branch, continue to the next block.
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00004640 if (I.getNumSuccessors() != 1 || I.isExceptionalTerminator())
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004641 return false;
4642 Pred = CaseDest;
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00004643 CaseDest = I.getSuccessor(0);
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00004644 } else if (Constant *C = ConstantFold(&I, DL, ConstantPool)) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004645 // Instruction is side-effect free and constant.
Hans Wennborgdcc6e5b2015-01-09 22:13:31 +00004646
4647 // If the instruction has uses outside this block or a phi node slot for
4648 // the block, it is not safe to bypass the instruction since it would then
4649 // no longer dominate all its uses.
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00004650 for (auto &Use : I.uses()) {
Hans Wennborgdcc6e5b2015-01-09 22:13:31 +00004651 User *User = Use.getUser();
4652 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(User))
4653 if (I->getParent() == CaseDest)
4654 continue;
4655 if (PHINode *Phi = dyn_cast<PHINode>(User))
4656 if (Phi->getIncomingBlock(Use) == CaseDest)
4657 continue;
4658 return false;
4659 }
4660
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00004661 ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(&I, C));
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004662 } else {
4663 break;
4664 }
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004665 }
4666
4667 // If we did not have a CommonDest before, use the current one.
4668 if (!*CommonDest)
4669 *CommonDest = CaseDest;
4670 // If the destination isn't the common one, abort.
4671 if (CaseDest != *CommonDest)
4672 return false;
4673
4674 // Get the values for this case from phi nodes in the destination block.
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00004675 for (PHINode &PHI : (*CommonDest)->phis()) {
4676 int Idx = PHI.getBasicBlockIndex(Pred);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004677 if (Idx == -1)
4678 continue;
4679
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004680 Constant *ConstVal =
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00004681 LookupConstant(PHI.getIncomingValue(Idx), ConstantPool);
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004682 if (!ConstVal)
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004683 return false;
4684
4685 // Be conservative about which kinds of constants we support.
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004686 if (!ValidLookupTableConstant(ConstVal, TTI))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004687 return false;
4688
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00004689 Res.push_back(std::make_pair(&PHI, ConstVal));
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004690 }
4691
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004692 return Res.size() > 0;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004693}
4694
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004695// Helper function used to add CaseVal to the list of cases that generate
Marcello Maggioni70834232018-01-11 02:01:16 +00004696// Result. Returns the updated number of cases that generate this result.
4697static uintptr_t MapCaseToResult(ConstantInt *CaseVal,
4698 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
4699 Constant *Result) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004700 for (auto &I : UniqueResults) {
4701 if (I.first == Result) {
4702 I.second.push_back(CaseVal);
Marcello Maggioni70834232018-01-11 02:01:16 +00004703 return I.second.size();
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004704 }
4705 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004706 UniqueResults.push_back(
4707 std::make_pair(Result, SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 4>(1, CaseVal)));
Marcello Maggioni70834232018-01-11 02:01:16 +00004708 return 1;
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004709}
4710
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004711// Helper function that initializes a map containing
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004712// results for the PHI node of the common destination block for a switch
4713// instruction. Returns false if multiple PHI nodes have been found or if
4714// there is not a common destination block for the switch.
Marcello Maggioni70834232018-01-11 02:01:16 +00004715static bool
4716InitializeUniqueCases(SwitchInst *SI, PHINode *&PHI, BasicBlock *&CommonDest,
4717 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
4718 Constant *&DefaultResult, const DataLayout &DL,
4719 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
4720 uintptr_t MaxUniqueResults, uintptr_t MaxCasesPerResult) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004721 for (auto &I : SI->cases()) {
4722 ConstantInt *CaseVal = I.getCaseValue();
4723
4724 // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
4725 SwitchCaseResultsTy Results;
4726 if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, I.getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest, Results,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004727 DL, TTI))
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004728 return false;
4729
Marcello Maggioniddccd502018-01-11 02:06:28 +00004730 // Only one value per case is permitted.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004731 if (Results.size() > 1)
4732 return false;
Marcello Maggioni70834232018-01-11 02:01:16 +00004733
4734 // Add the case->result mapping to UniqueResults.
4735 const uintptr_t NumCasesForResult =
4736 MapCaseToResult(CaseVal, UniqueResults, Results.begin()->second);
4737
4738 // Early out if there are too many cases for this result.
4739 if (NumCasesForResult > MaxCasesPerResult)
4740 return false;
4741
4742 // Early out if there are too many unique results.
4743 if (UniqueResults.size() > MaxUniqueResults)
4744 return false;
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004745
4746 // Check the PHI consistency.
4747 if (!PHI)
4748 PHI = Results[0].first;
4749 else if (PHI != Results[0].first)
4750 return false;
4751 }
4752 // Find the default result value.
4753 SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 1> DefaultResults;
4754 BasicBlock *DefaultDest = SI->getDefaultDest();
4755 GetCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(), &CommonDest, DefaultResults,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004756 DL, TTI);
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004757 // If the default value is not found abort unless the default destination
4758 // is unreachable.
4759 DefaultResult =
4760 DefaultResults.size() == 1 ? DefaultResults.begin()->second : nullptr;
4761 if ((!DefaultResult &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004762 !isa<UnreachableInst>(DefaultDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg())))
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004763 return false;
4764
4765 return true;
4766}
4767
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004768// Helper function that checks if it is possible to transform a switch with only
4769// two cases (or two cases + default) that produces a result into a select.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004770// Example:
4771// switch (a) {
4772// case 10: %0 = icmp eq i32 %a, 10
4773// return 10; %1 = select i1 %0, i32 10, i32 4
4774// case 20: ----> %2 = icmp eq i32 %a, 20
4775// return 2; %3 = select i1 %2, i32 2, i32 %1
4776// default:
4777// return 4;
4778// }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004779static Value *ConvertTwoCaseSwitch(const SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &ResultVector,
4780 Constant *DefaultResult, Value *Condition,
4781 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004782 assert(ResultVector.size() == 2 &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004783 "We should have exactly two unique results at this point");
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004784 // If we are selecting between only two cases transform into a simple
4785 // select or a two-way select if default is possible.
4786 if (ResultVector[0].second.size() == 1 &&
4787 ResultVector[1].second.size() == 1) {
4788 ConstantInt *const FirstCase = ResultVector[0].second[0];
4789 ConstantInt *const SecondCase = ResultVector[1].second[0];
4790
4791 bool DefaultCanTrigger = DefaultResult;
4792 Value *SelectValue = ResultVector[1].first;
4793 if (DefaultCanTrigger) {
4794 Value *const ValueCompare =
4795 Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, SecondCase, "switch.selectcmp");
4796 SelectValue = Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[1].first,
4797 DefaultResult, "switch.select");
4798 }
4799 Value *const ValueCompare =
4800 Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, FirstCase, "switch.selectcmp");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004801 return Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[0].first,
4802 SelectValue, "switch.select");
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004803 }
4804
4805 return nullptr;
4806}
4807
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004808// Helper function to cleanup a switch instruction that has been converted into
4809// a select, fixing up PHI nodes and basic blocks.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004810static void RemoveSwitchAfterSelectConversion(SwitchInst *SI, PHINode *PHI,
4811 Value *SelectValue,
4812 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
4813 BasicBlock *SelectBB = SI->getParent();
4814 while (PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(SelectBB) >= 0)
4815 PHI->removeIncomingValue(SelectBB);
4816 PHI->addIncoming(SelectValue, SelectBB);
4817
4818 Builder.CreateBr(PHI->getParent());
4819
4820 // Remove the switch.
4821 for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
4822 BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
4823
4824 if (Succ == PHI->getParent())
4825 continue;
4826 Succ->removePredecessor(SelectBB);
4827 }
4828 SI->eraseFromParent();
4829}
4830
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004831/// If the switch is only used to initialize one or more
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004832/// phi nodes in a common successor block with only two different
4833/// constant values, replace the switch with select.
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00004834static bool switchToSelect(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
4835 const DataLayout &DL,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004836 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004837 Value *const Cond = SI->getCondition();
4838 PHINode *PHI = nullptr;
4839 BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
4840 Constant *DefaultResult;
4841 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy UniqueResults;
4842 // Collect all the cases that will deliver the same value from the switch.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004843 if (!InitializeUniqueCases(SI, PHI, CommonDest, UniqueResults, DefaultResult,
Marcello Maggioni70834232018-01-11 02:01:16 +00004844 DL, TTI, 2, 1))
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004845 return false;
4846 // Selects choose between maximum two values.
4847 if (UniqueResults.size() != 2)
4848 return false;
4849 assert(PHI != nullptr && "PHI for value select not found");
4850
4851 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004852 Value *SelectValue =
4853 ConvertTwoCaseSwitch(UniqueResults, DefaultResult, Cond, Builder);
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004854 if (SelectValue) {
4855 RemoveSwitchAfterSelectConversion(SI, PHI, SelectValue, Builder);
4856 return true;
4857 }
4858 // The switch couldn't be converted into a select.
4859 return false;
4860}
4861
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004862namespace {
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00004863
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004864/// This class represents a lookup table that can be used to replace a switch.
4865class SwitchLookupTable {
4866public:
4867 /// Create a lookup table to use as a switch replacement with the contents
4868 /// of Values, using DefaultValue to fill any holes in the table.
4869 SwitchLookupTable(
4870 Module &M, uint64_t TableSize, ConstantInt *Offset,
4871 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values,
Sumanth Gundapaneni5372f0a2017-06-30 20:00:01 +00004872 Constant *DefaultValue, const DataLayout &DL, const StringRef &FuncName);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004873
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004874 /// Build instructions with Builder to retrieve the value at
4875 /// the position given by Index in the lookup table.
4876 Value *BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004877
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004878 /// Return true if a table with TableSize elements of
4879 /// type ElementType would fit in a target-legal register.
4880 static bool WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout &DL, uint64_t TableSize,
4881 Type *ElementType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004882
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004883private:
4884 // Depending on the contents of the table, it can be represented in
4885 // different ways.
4886 enum {
4887 // For tables where each element contains the same value, we just have to
4888 // store that single value and return it for each lookup.
4889 SingleValueKind,
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004890
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004891 // For tables where there is a linear relationship between table index
4892 // and values. We calculate the result with a simple multiplication
4893 // and addition instead of a table lookup.
4894 LinearMapKind,
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004895
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004896 // For small tables with integer elements, we can pack them into a bitmap
4897 // that fits into a target-legal register. Values are retrieved by
4898 // shift and mask operations.
4899 BitMapKind,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004900
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004901 // The table is stored as an array of values. Values are retrieved by load
4902 // instructions from the table.
4903 ArrayKind
4904 } Kind;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004905
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004906 // For SingleValueKind, this is the single value.
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00004907 Constant *SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004908
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004909 // For BitMapKind, this is the bitmap.
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00004910 ConstantInt *BitMap = nullptr;
4911 IntegerType *BitMapElementTy = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004912
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004913 // For LinearMapKind, these are the constants used to derive the value.
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00004914 ConstantInt *LinearOffset = nullptr;
4915 ConstantInt *LinearMultiplier = nullptr;
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004916
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004917 // For ArrayKind, this is the array.
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00004918 GlobalVariable *Array = nullptr;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004919};
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00004920
4921} // end anonymous namespace
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004922
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004923SwitchLookupTable::SwitchLookupTable(
4924 Module &M, uint64_t TableSize, ConstantInt *Offset,
4925 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values,
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00004926 Constant *DefaultValue, const DataLayout &DL, const StringRef &FuncName) {
Hans Wennborgf2e2c102012-09-26 11:07:37 +00004927 assert(Values.size() && "Can't build lookup table without values!");
4928 assert(TableSize >= Values.size() && "Can't fit values in table!");
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004929
4930 // If all values in the table are equal, this is that value.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004931 SingleValue = Values.begin()->second;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004932
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004933 Type *ValueType = Values.begin()->second->getType();
4934
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004935 // Build up the table contents.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004936 SmallVector<Constant *, 64> TableContents(TableSize);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004937 for (size_t I = 0, E = Values.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4938 ConstantInt *CaseVal = Values[I].first;
4939 Constant *CaseRes = Values[I].second;
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004940 assert(CaseRes->getType() == ValueType);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004941
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004942 uint64_t Idx = (CaseVal->getValue() - Offset->getValue()).getLimitedValue();
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004943 TableContents[Idx] = CaseRes;
4944
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004945 if (CaseRes != SingleValue)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004946 SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004947 }
4948
4949 // Fill in any holes in the table with the default result.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004950 if (Values.size() < TableSize) {
Marcello Maggioni89c05ad2014-07-03 08:29:06 +00004951 assert(DefaultValue &&
4952 "Need a default value to fill the lookup table holes.");
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004953 assert(DefaultValue->getType() == ValueType);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004954 for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
4955 if (!TableContents[I])
4956 TableContents[I] = DefaultValue;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004957 }
4958
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004959 if (DefaultValue != SingleValue)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004960 SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004961 }
4962
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004963 // If each element in the table contains the same value, we only need to store
4964 // that single value.
4965 if (SingleValue) {
4966 Kind = SingleValueKind;
4967 return;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004968 }
4969
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004970 // Check if we can derive the value with a linear transformation from the
4971 // table index.
4972 if (isa<IntegerType>(ValueType)) {
4973 bool LinearMappingPossible = true;
4974 APInt PrevVal;
4975 APInt DistToPrev;
4976 assert(TableSize >= 2 && "Should be a SingleValue table.");
4977 // Check if there is the same distance between two consecutive values.
4978 for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
4979 ConstantInt *ConstVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I]);
4980 if (!ConstVal) {
4981 // This is an undef. We could deal with it, but undefs in lookup tables
4982 // are very seldom. It's probably not worth the additional complexity.
4983 LinearMappingPossible = false;
4984 break;
4985 }
Craig Toppere777fed2017-05-22 00:49:35 +00004986 const APInt &Val = ConstVal->getValue();
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004987 if (I != 0) {
4988 APInt Dist = Val - PrevVal;
4989 if (I == 1) {
4990 DistToPrev = Dist;
4991 } else if (Dist != DistToPrev) {
4992 LinearMappingPossible = false;
4993 break;
4994 }
4995 }
4996 PrevVal = Val;
4997 }
4998 if (LinearMappingPossible) {
4999 LinearOffset = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[0]);
5000 LinearMultiplier = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), DistToPrev);
5001 Kind = LinearMapKind;
5002 ++NumLinearMaps;
5003 return;
5004 }
5005 }
5006
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005007 // If the type is integer and the table fits in a register, build a bitmap.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00005008 if (WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, ValueType)) {
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005009 IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(ValueType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005010 APInt TableInt(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth(), 0);
5011 for (uint64_t I = TableSize; I > 0; --I) {
5012 TableInt <<= IT->getBitWidth();
Benjamin Kramer9fc3dc72012-10-01 11:31:48 +00005013 // Insert values into the bitmap. Undef values are set to zero.
5014 if (!isa<UndefValue>(TableContents[I - 1])) {
5015 ConstantInt *Val = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I - 1]);
5016 TableInt |= Val->getValue().zext(TableInt.getBitWidth());
5017 }
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005018 }
5019 BitMap = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), TableInt);
5020 BitMapElementTy = IT;
5021 Kind = BitMapKind;
5022 ++NumBitMaps;
5023 return;
5024 }
5025
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005026 // Store the table in an array.
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005027 ArrayType *ArrayTy = ArrayType::get(ValueType, TableSize);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005028 Constant *Initializer = ConstantArray::get(ArrayTy, TableContents);
5029
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005030 Array = new GlobalVariable(M, ArrayTy, /*constant=*/true,
5031 GlobalVariable::PrivateLinkage, Initializer,
Sumanth Gundapaneni5372f0a2017-06-30 20:00:01 +00005032 "switch.table." + FuncName);
Peter Collingbourne96efdd62016-06-14 21:01:22 +00005033 Array->setUnnamedAddr(GlobalValue::UnnamedAddr::Global);
David Green2352b302018-09-12 09:54:17 +00005034 // Set the alignment to that of an array items. We will be only loading one
5035 // value out of it.
5036 Array->setAlignment(DL.getPrefTypeAlignment(ValueType));
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005037 Kind = ArrayKind;
5038}
5039
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00005040Value *SwitchLookupTable::BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005041 switch (Kind) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005042 case SingleValueKind:
5043 return SingleValue;
5044 case LinearMapKind: {
5045 // Derive the result value from the input value.
5046 Value *Result = Builder.CreateIntCast(Index, LinearMultiplier->getType(),
5047 false, "switch.idx.cast");
5048 if (!LinearMultiplier->isOne())
5049 Result = Builder.CreateMul(Result, LinearMultiplier, "switch.idx.mult");
5050 if (!LinearOffset->isZero())
5051 Result = Builder.CreateAdd(Result, LinearOffset, "switch.offset");
5052 return Result;
5053 }
5054 case BitMapKind: {
5055 // Type of the bitmap (e.g. i59).
5056 IntegerType *MapTy = BitMap->getType();
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005057
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005058 // Cast Index to the same type as the bitmap.
5059 // Note: The Index is <= the number of elements in the table, so
5060 // truncating it to the width of the bitmask is safe.
5061 Value *ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(Index, MapTy, "switch.cast");
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005062
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005063 // Multiply the shift amount by the element width.
5064 ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateMul(
5065 ShiftAmt, ConstantInt::get(MapTy, BitMapElementTy->getBitWidth()),
5066 "switch.shiftamt");
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005067
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005068 // Shift down.
5069 Value *DownShifted =
5070 Builder.CreateLShr(BitMap, ShiftAmt, "switch.downshift");
5071 // Mask off.
5072 return Builder.CreateTrunc(DownShifted, BitMapElementTy, "switch.masked");
5073 }
5074 case ArrayKind: {
5075 // Make sure the table index will not overflow when treated as signed.
5076 IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(Index->getType());
5077 uint64_t TableSize =
5078 Array->getInitializer()->getType()->getArrayNumElements();
5079 if (TableSize > (1ULL << (IT->getBitWidth() - 1)))
5080 Index = Builder.CreateZExt(
5081 Index, IntegerType::get(IT->getContext(), IT->getBitWidth() + 1),
5082 "switch.tableidx.zext");
Manman Renedc60372014-07-23 23:13:23 +00005083
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005084 Value *GEPIndices[] = {Builder.getInt32(0), Index};
5085 Value *GEP = Builder.CreateInBoundsGEP(Array->getValueType(), Array,
5086 GEPIndices, "switch.gep");
5087 return Builder.CreateLoad(GEP, "switch.load");
5088 }
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005089 }
5090 llvm_unreachable("Unknown lookup table kind!");
5091}
5092
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005093bool SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout &DL,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005094 uint64_t TableSize,
Craig Toppere3dcce92015-08-01 22:20:21 +00005095 Type *ElementType) {
5096 auto *IT = dyn_cast<IntegerType>(ElementType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005097 if (!IT)
5098 return false;
5099 // FIXME: If the type is wider than it needs to be, e.g. i8 but all values
5100 // are <= 15, we could try to narrow the type.
Benjamin Kramerc2081d12012-09-27 18:29:58 +00005101
5102 // Avoid overflow, fitsInLegalInteger uses unsigned int for the width.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005103 if (TableSize >= UINT_MAX / IT->getBitWidth())
Benjamin Kramerc2081d12012-09-27 18:29:58 +00005104 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005105 return DL.fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth());
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005106}
5107
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00005108/// Determine whether a lookup table should be built for this switch, based on
5109/// the number of cases, size of the table, and the types of the results.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005110static bool
5111ShouldBuildLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, uint64_t TableSize,
5112 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const DataLayout &DL,
5113 const SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Type *> &ResultTypes) {
Hans Wennborgf2e2c102012-09-26 11:07:37 +00005114 if (SI->getNumCases() > TableSize || TableSize >= UINT64_MAX / 10)
5115 return false; // TableSize overflowed, or mul below might overflow.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005116
Chandler Carruth77d433d2012-11-30 09:26:25 +00005117 bool AllTablesFitInRegister = true;
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00005118 bool HasIllegalType = false;
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005119 for (const auto &I : ResultTypes) {
5120 Type *Ty = I.second;
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00005121
5122 // Saturate this flag to true.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00005123 HasIllegalType = HasIllegalType || !TTI.isTypeLegal(Ty);
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00005124
5125 // Saturate this flag to false.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005126 AllTablesFitInRegister =
5127 AllTablesFitInRegister &&
5128 SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, Ty);
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00005129
5130 // If both flags saturate, we're done. NOTE: This *only* works with
5131 // saturating flags, and all flags have to saturate first due to the
5132 // non-deterministic behavior of iterating over a dense map.
5133 if (HasIllegalType && !AllTablesFitInRegister)
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00005134 break;
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005135 }
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00005136
Chandler Carruth77d433d2012-11-30 09:26:25 +00005137 // If each table would fit in a register, we should build it anyway.
5138 if (AllTablesFitInRegister)
5139 return true;
5140
5141 // Don't build a table that doesn't fit in-register if it has illegal types.
5142 if (HasIllegalType)
5143 return false;
5144
5145 // The table density should be at least 40%. This is the same criterion as for
5146 // jump tables, see SelectionDAGBuilder::handleJTSwitchCase.
5147 // FIXME: Find the best cut-off.
5148 return SI->getNumCases() * 10 >= TableSize * 4;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005149}
5150
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005151/// Try to reuse the switch table index compare. Following pattern:
5152/// \code
5153/// if (idx < tablesize)
5154/// r = table[idx]; // table does not contain default_value
5155/// else
5156/// r = default_value;
5157/// if (r != default_value)
5158/// ...
5159/// \endcode
5160/// Is optimized to:
5161/// \code
5162/// cond = idx < tablesize;
5163/// if (cond)
5164/// r = table[idx];
5165/// else
5166/// r = default_value;
5167/// if (cond)
5168/// ...
5169/// \endcode
5170/// Jump threading will then eliminate the second if(cond).
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005171static void reuseTableCompare(
5172 User *PhiUser, BasicBlock *PhiBlock, BranchInst *RangeCheckBranch,
5173 Constant *DefaultValue,
5174 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values) {
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005175 ICmpInst *CmpInst = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(PhiUser);
5176 if (!CmpInst)
5177 return;
5178
5179 // We require that the compare is in the same block as the phi so that jump
5180 // threading can do its work afterwards.
5181 if (CmpInst->getParent() != PhiBlock)
5182 return;
5183
5184 Constant *CmpOp1 = dyn_cast<Constant>(CmpInst->getOperand(1));
5185 if (!CmpOp1)
5186 return;
5187
5188 Value *RangeCmp = RangeCheckBranch->getCondition();
5189 Constant *TrueConst = ConstantInt::getTrue(RangeCmp->getType());
5190 Constant *FalseConst = ConstantInt::getFalse(RangeCmp->getType());
5191
5192 // Check if the compare with the default value is constant true or false.
5193 Constant *DefaultConst = ConstantExpr::getICmp(CmpInst->getPredicate(),
5194 DefaultValue, CmpOp1, true);
5195 if (DefaultConst != TrueConst && DefaultConst != FalseConst)
5196 return;
5197
5198 // Check if the compare with the case values is distinct from the default
5199 // compare result.
5200 for (auto ValuePair : Values) {
5201 Constant *CaseConst = ConstantExpr::getICmp(CmpInst->getPredicate(),
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005202 ValuePair.second, CmpOp1, true);
Mikael Holmen0a3e9802017-12-05 14:14:00 +00005203 if (!CaseConst || CaseConst == DefaultConst || isa<UndefValue>(CaseConst))
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005204 return;
5205 assert((CaseConst == TrueConst || CaseConst == FalseConst) &&
5206 "Expect true or false as compare result.");
5207 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005208
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005209 // Check if the branch instruction dominates the phi node. It's a simple
5210 // dominance check, but sufficient for our needs.
5211 // Although this check is invariant in the calling loops, it's better to do it
5212 // at this late stage. Practically we do it at most once for a switch.
5213 BasicBlock *BranchBlock = RangeCheckBranch->getParent();
5214 for (auto PI = pred_begin(PhiBlock), E = pred_end(PhiBlock); PI != E; ++PI) {
5215 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI;
5216 if (Pred != BranchBlock && Pred->getUniquePredecessor() != BranchBlock)
5217 return;
5218 }
5219
5220 if (DefaultConst == FalseConst) {
5221 // The compare yields the same result. We can replace it.
5222 CmpInst->replaceAllUsesWith(RangeCmp);
5223 ++NumTableCmpReuses;
5224 } else {
5225 // The compare yields the same result, just inverted. We can replace it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005226 Value *InvertedTableCmp = BinaryOperator::CreateXor(
5227 RangeCmp, ConstantInt::get(RangeCmp->getType(), 1), "inverted.cmp",
5228 RangeCheckBranch);
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005229 CmpInst->replaceAllUsesWith(InvertedTableCmp);
5230 ++NumTableCmpReuses;
5231 }
5232}
5233
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00005234/// If the switch is only used to initialize one or more phi nodes in a common
5235/// successor block with different constant values, replace the switch with
5236/// lookup tables.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005237static bool SwitchToLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
5238 const DataLayout &DL,
5239 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005240 assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00005241
Sumanth Gundapaneni8d50a502017-07-28 22:25:40 +00005242 Function *Fn = SI->getParent()->getParent();
5243 // Only build lookup table when we have a target that supports it or the
5244 // attribute is not set.
5245 if (!TTI.shouldBuildLookupTables() ||
5246 (Fn->getFnAttribute("no-jump-tables").getValueAsString() == "true"))
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00005247 return false;
5248
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005249 // FIXME: If the switch is too sparse for a lookup table, perhaps we could
5250 // split off a dense part and build a lookup table for that.
5251
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005252 // FIXME: This creates arrays of GEPs to constant strings, which means each
5253 // GEP needs a runtime relocation in PIC code. We should just build one big
5254 // string and lookup indices into that.
5255
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005256 // Ignore switches with less than three cases. Lookup tables will not make
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005257 // them faster, so we don't analyze them.
Hans Wennborg4744ac12014-01-15 05:00:27 +00005258 if (SI->getNumCases() < 3)
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005259 return false;
5260
5261 // Figure out the corresponding result for each case value and phi node in the
Eric Christopher572e03a2015-06-19 01:53:21 +00005262 // common destination, as well as the min and max case values.
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005263 assert(SI->case_begin() != SI->case_end());
5264 SwitchInst::CaseIt CI = SI->case_begin();
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00005265 ConstantInt *MinCaseVal = CI->getCaseValue();
5266 ConstantInt *MaxCaseVal = CI->getCaseValue();
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005267
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00005268 BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00005269
5270 using ResultListTy = SmallVector<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>, 4>;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005271 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, ResultListTy> ResultLists;
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00005272
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005273 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Constant *> DefaultResults;
5274 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Type *> ResultTypes;
5275 SmallVector<PHINode *, 4> PHIs;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005276
5277 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt E = SI->case_end(); CI != E; ++CI) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00005278 ConstantInt *CaseVal = CI->getCaseValue();
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005279 if (CaseVal->getValue().slt(MinCaseVal->getValue()))
5280 MinCaseVal = CaseVal;
5281 if (CaseVal->getValue().sgt(MaxCaseVal->getValue()))
5282 MaxCaseVal = CaseVal;
5283
5284 // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00005285 using ResultsTy = SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4>;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005286 ResultsTy Results;
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00005287 if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, CI->getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00005288 Results, DL, TTI))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005289 return false;
5290
5291 // Append the result from this case to the list for each phi.
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005292 for (const auto &I : Results) {
5293 PHINode *PHI = I.first;
5294 Constant *Value = I.second;
5295 if (!ResultLists.count(PHI))
5296 PHIs.push_back(PHI);
5297 ResultLists[PHI].push_back(std::make_pair(CaseVal, Value));
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005298 }
5299 }
5300
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005301 // Keep track of the result types.
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005302 for (PHINode *PHI : PHIs) {
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005303 ResultTypes[PHI] = ResultLists[PHI][0].second->getType();
5304 }
5305
5306 uint64_t NumResults = ResultLists[PHIs[0]].size();
5307 APInt RangeSpread = MaxCaseVal->getValue() - MinCaseVal->getValue();
5308 uint64_t TableSize = RangeSpread.getLimitedValue() + 1;
5309 bool TableHasHoles = (NumResults < TableSize);
5310
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005311 // If the table has holes, we need a constant result for the default case
5312 // or a bitmask that fits in a register.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005313 SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4> DefaultResultsList;
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00005314 bool HasDefaultResults =
5315 GetCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(), &CommonDest,
5316 DefaultResultsList, DL, TTI);
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005317
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005318 bool NeedMask = (TableHasHoles && !HasDefaultResults);
5319 if (NeedMask) {
5320 // As an extra penalty for the validity test we require more cases.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005321 if (SI->getNumCases() < 4) // FIXME: Find best threshold value (benchmark).
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005322 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005323 if (!DL.fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize))
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005324 return false;
5325 }
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005326
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005327 for (const auto &I : DefaultResultsList) {
5328 PHINode *PHI = I.first;
5329 Constant *Result = I.second;
Hans Wennborg7fd5c8442012-09-10 07:44:22 +00005330 DefaultResults[PHI] = Result;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005331 }
5332
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00005333 if (!ShouldBuildLookupTable(SI, TableSize, TTI, DL, ResultTypes))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005334 return false;
5335
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005336 // Create the BB that does the lookups.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005337 Module &Mod = *CommonDest->getParent()->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005338 BasicBlock *LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(
5339 Mod.getContext(), "switch.lookup", CommonDest->getParent(), CommonDest);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005340
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005341 // Compute the table index value.
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005342 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
Sanjay Patel73811a12017-09-20 22:31:35 +00005343 Value *TableIndex;
5344 if (MinCaseVal->isNullValue())
5345 TableIndex = SI->getCondition();
5346 else
5347 TableIndex = Builder.CreateSub(SI->getCondition(), MinCaseVal,
5348 "switch.tableidx");
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005349
5350 // Compute the maximum table size representable by the integer type we are
5351 // switching upon.
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00005352 unsigned CaseSize = MinCaseVal->getType()->getPrimitiveSizeInBits();
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005353 uint64_t MaxTableSize = CaseSize > 63 ? UINT64_MAX : 1ULL << CaseSize;
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005354 assert(MaxTableSize >= TableSize &&
5355 "It is impossible for a switch to have more entries than the max "
5356 "representable value of its input integer type's size.");
5357
Hans Wennborgb64cb272015-01-26 19:52:34 +00005358 // If the default destination is unreachable, or if the lookup table covers
5359 // all values of the conditional variable, branch directly to the lookup table
5360 // BB. Otherwise, check that the condition is within the case range.
5361 const bool DefaultIsReachable =
5362 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
5363 const bool GeneratingCoveredLookupTable = (MaxTableSize == TableSize);
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005364 BranchInst *RangeCheckBranch = nullptr;
5365
Hans Wennborgb64cb272015-01-26 19:52:34 +00005366 if (!DefaultIsReachable || GeneratingCoveredLookupTable) {
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005367 Builder.CreateBr(LookupBB);
Hans Wennborg86ac6302015-04-24 20:57:56 +00005368 // Note: We call removeProdecessor later since we need to be able to get the
5369 // PHI value for the default case in case we're using a bit mask.
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005370 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005371 Value *Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(
5372 TableIndex, ConstantInt::get(MinCaseVal->getType(), TableSize));
5373 RangeCheckBranch =
5374 Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005375 }
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005376
5377 // Populate the BB that does the lookups.
5378 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005379
5380 if (NeedMask) {
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005381 // Before doing the lookup, we do the hole check. The LookupBB is therefore
5382 // re-purposed to do the hole check, and we create a new LookupBB.
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005383 BasicBlock *MaskBB = LookupBB;
5384 MaskBB->setName("switch.hole_check");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005385 LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(Mod.getContext(), "switch.lookup",
5386 CommonDest->getParent(), CommonDest);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005387
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005388 // Make the mask's bitwidth at least 8-bit and a power-of-2 to avoid
Juergen Ributzkac9591e92014-11-17 19:39:56 +00005389 // unnecessary illegal types.
5390 uint64_t TableSizePowOf2 = NextPowerOf2(std::max(7ULL, TableSize - 1ULL));
5391 APInt MaskInt(TableSizePowOf2, 0);
5392 APInt One(TableSizePowOf2, 1);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005393 // Build bitmask; fill in a 1 bit for every case.
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005394 const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHIs[0]];
5395 for (size_t I = 0, E = ResultList.size(); I != E; ++I) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005396 uint64_t Idx = (ResultList[I].first->getValue() - MinCaseVal->getValue())
5397 .getLimitedValue();
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005398 MaskInt |= One << Idx;
5399 }
5400 ConstantInt *TableMask = ConstantInt::get(Mod.getContext(), MaskInt);
5401
5402 // Get the TableIndex'th bit of the bitmask.
5403 // If this bit is 0 (meaning hole) jump to the default destination,
5404 // else continue with table lookup.
5405 IntegerType *MapTy = TableMask->getType();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005406 Value *MaskIndex =
5407 Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(TableIndex, MapTy, "switch.maskindex");
5408 Value *Shifted = Builder.CreateLShr(TableMask, MaskIndex, "switch.shifted");
5409 Value *LoBit = Builder.CreateTrunc(
5410 Shifted, Type::getInt1Ty(Mod.getContext()), "switch.lobit");
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005411 Builder.CreateCondBr(LoBit, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
5412
5413 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
5414 AddPredecessorToBlock(SI->getDefaultDest(), MaskBB, SI->getParent());
5415 }
5416
Hans Wennborg86ac6302015-04-24 20:57:56 +00005417 if (!DefaultIsReachable || GeneratingCoveredLookupTable) {
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005418 // We cached PHINodes in PHIs. To avoid accessing deleted PHINodes later,
Hans Wennborg86ac6302015-04-24 20:57:56 +00005419 // do not delete PHINodes here.
5420 SI->getDefaultDest()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent(),
5421 /*DontDeleteUselessPHIs=*/true);
5422 }
5423
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005424 bool ReturnedEarly = false;
George Burgess IVf9d26af2018-05-05 04:52:26 +00005425 for (PHINode *PHI : PHIs) {
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005426 const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHI];
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005427
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005428 // If using a bitmask, use any value to fill the lookup table holes.
5429 Constant *DV = NeedMask ? ResultLists[PHI][0].second : DefaultResults[PHI];
Sumanth Gundapaneni8d50a502017-07-28 22:25:40 +00005430 StringRef FuncName = Fn->getName();
Sumanth Gundapaneni5372f0a2017-06-30 20:00:01 +00005431 SwitchLookupTable Table(Mod, TableSize, MinCaseVal, ResultList, DV, DL,
5432 FuncName);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005433
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00005434 Value *Result = Table.BuildLookup(TableIndex, Builder);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005435
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00005436 // If the result is used to return immediately from the function, we want to
5437 // do that right here.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00005438 if (PHI->hasOneUse() && isa<ReturnInst>(*PHI->user_begin()) &&
5439 PHI->user_back() == CommonDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()) {
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00005440 Builder.CreateRet(Result);
5441 ReturnedEarly = true;
5442 break;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005443 }
5444
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005445 // Do a small peephole optimization: re-use the switch table compare if
5446 // possible.
5447 if (!TableHasHoles && HasDefaultResults && RangeCheckBranch) {
5448 BasicBlock *PhiBlock = PHI->getParent();
5449 // Search for compare instructions which use the phi.
5450 for (auto *User : PHI->users()) {
5451 reuseTableCompare(User, PhiBlock, RangeCheckBranch, DV, ResultList);
5452 }
5453 }
5454
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00005455 PHI->addIncoming(Result, LookupBB);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005456 }
5457
5458 if (!ReturnedEarly)
5459 Builder.CreateBr(CommonDest);
5460
5461 // Remove the switch.
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00005462 for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005463 BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005464
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00005465 if (Succ == SI->getDefaultDest())
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005466 continue;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005467 Succ->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
5468 }
5469 SI->eraseFromParent();
5470
5471 ++NumLookupTables;
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005472 if (NeedMask)
5473 ++NumLookupTablesHoles;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005474 return true;
5475}
5476
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005477static bool isSwitchDense(ArrayRef<int64_t> Values) {
5478 // See also SelectionDAGBuilder::isDense(), which this function was based on.
5479 uint64_t Diff = (uint64_t)Values.back() - (uint64_t)Values.front();
5480 uint64_t Range = Diff + 1;
5481 uint64_t NumCases = Values.size();
5482 // 40% is the default density for building a jump table in optsize/minsize mode.
5483 uint64_t MinDensity = 40;
Junmo Parkdb8f6ee2016-08-02 04:38:27 +00005484
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005485 return NumCases * 100 >= Range * MinDensity;
5486}
5487
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005488/// Try to transform a switch that has "holes" in it to a contiguous sequence
5489/// of cases.
5490///
5491/// A switch such as: switch(i) {case 5: case 9: case 13: case 17:} can be
5492/// range-reduced to: switch ((i-5) / 4) {case 0: case 1: case 2: case 3:}.
5493///
5494/// This converts a sparse switch into a dense switch which allows better
5495/// lowering and could also allow transforming into a lookup table.
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005496static bool ReduceSwitchRange(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
5497 const DataLayout &DL,
5498 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
5499 auto *CondTy = cast<IntegerType>(SI->getCondition()->getType());
5500 if (CondTy->getIntegerBitWidth() > 64 ||
5501 !DL.fitsInLegalInteger(CondTy->getIntegerBitWidth()))
5502 return false;
5503 // Only bother with this optimization if there are more than 3 switch cases;
5504 // SDAG will only bother creating jump tables for 4 or more cases.
5505 if (SI->getNumCases() < 4)
5506 return false;
5507
5508 // This transform is agnostic to the signedness of the input or case values. We
5509 // can treat the case values as signed or unsigned. We can optimize more common
5510 // cases such as a sequence crossing zero {-4,0,4,8} if we interpret case values
5511 // as signed.
5512 SmallVector<int64_t,4> Values;
5513 for (auto &C : SI->cases())
5514 Values.push_back(C.getCaseValue()->getValue().getSExtValue());
Fangrui Song0cac7262018-09-27 02:13:45 +00005515 llvm::sort(Values);
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005516
5517 // If the switch is already dense, there's nothing useful to do here.
5518 if (isSwitchDense(Values))
5519 return false;
5520
5521 // First, transform the values such that they start at zero and ascend.
5522 int64_t Base = Values[0];
5523 for (auto &V : Values)
Vitaly Buka524c0a62017-10-17 18:33:15 +00005524 V -= (uint64_t)(Base);
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005525
5526 // Now we have signed numbers that have been shifted so that, given enough
5527 // precision, there are no negative values. Since the rest of the transform
5528 // is bitwise only, we switch now to an unsigned representation.
5529 uint64_t GCD = 0;
5530 for (auto &V : Values)
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00005531 GCD = GreatestCommonDivisor64(GCD, (uint64_t)V);
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005532
5533 // This transform can be done speculatively because it is so cheap - it results
5534 // in a single rotate operation being inserted. This can only happen if the
5535 // factor extracted is a power of 2.
5536 // FIXME: If the GCD is an odd number we can multiply by the multiplicative
5537 // inverse of GCD and then perform this transform.
5538 // FIXME: It's possible that optimizing a switch on powers of two might also
5539 // be beneficial - flag values are often powers of two and we could use a CLZ
5540 // as the key function.
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00005541 if (GCD <= 1 || !isPowerOf2_64(GCD))
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005542 // No common divisor found or too expensive to compute key function.
5543 return false;
5544
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00005545 unsigned Shift = Log2_64(GCD);
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005546 for (auto &V : Values)
5547 V = (int64_t)((uint64_t)V >> Shift);
5548
5549 if (!isSwitchDense(Values))
5550 // Transform didn't create a dense switch.
5551 return false;
5552
5553 // The obvious transform is to shift the switch condition right and emit a
5554 // check that the condition actually cleanly divided by GCD, i.e.
5555 // C & (1 << Shift - 1) == 0
5556 // inserting a new CFG edge to handle the case where it didn't divide cleanly.
5557 //
5558 // A cheaper way of doing this is a simple ROTR(C, Shift). This performs the
5559 // shift and puts the shifted-off bits in the uppermost bits. If any of these
5560 // are nonzero then the switch condition will be very large and will hit the
5561 // default case.
Junmo Parkdb8f6ee2016-08-02 04:38:27 +00005562
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005563 auto *Ty = cast<IntegerType>(SI->getCondition()->getType());
5564 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
5565 auto *ShiftC = ConstantInt::get(Ty, Shift);
5566 auto *Sub = Builder.CreateSub(SI->getCondition(), ConstantInt::get(Ty, Base));
Benjamin Krameraa160c22016-08-05 14:55:02 +00005567 auto *LShr = Builder.CreateLShr(Sub, ShiftC);
5568 auto *Shl = Builder.CreateShl(Sub, Ty->getBitWidth() - Shift);
5569 auto *Rot = Builder.CreateOr(LShr, Shl);
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005570 SI->replaceUsesOfWith(SI->getCondition(), Rot);
5571
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00005572 for (auto Case : SI->cases()) {
5573 auto *Orig = Case.getCaseValue();
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005574 auto Sub = Orig->getValue() - APInt(Ty->getBitWidth(), Base);
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00005575 Case.setValue(
James Molloybade86c2016-08-01 09:34:48 +00005576 cast<ConstantInt>(ConstantInt::get(Ty, Sub.lshr(ShiftC->getValue()))));
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005577 }
5578 return true;
5579}
5580
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005581bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005582 BasicBlock *BB = SI->getParent();
5583
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005584 if (isValueEqualityComparison(SI)) {
5585 // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
5586 // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this switch.
5587 if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
5588 if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(SI, OnlyPred, Builder))
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00005589 return requestResimplify();
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00005590
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005591 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
5592 if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(Cond))
5593 if (SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SI, Select))
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00005594 return requestResimplify();
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00005595
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005596 // If the block only contains the switch, see if we can fold the block
5597 // away into any preds.
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00005598 if (SI == &*BB->instructionsWithoutDebug().begin())
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005599 if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(SI, Builder))
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00005600 return requestResimplify();
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005601 }
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00005602
5603 // Try to transform the switch into an icmp and a branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005604 if (TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SI, Builder))
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00005605 return requestResimplify();
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00005606
5607 // Remove unreachable cases.
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005608 if (eliminateDeadSwitchCases(SI, Options.AC, DL))
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00005609 return requestResimplify();
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00005610
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005611 if (switchToSelect(SI, Builder, DL, TTI))
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00005612 return requestResimplify();
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00005613
Sanjay Patelb80daf02017-10-22 19:10:07 +00005614 if (Options.ForwardSwitchCondToPhi && ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SI))
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00005615 return requestResimplify();
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00005616
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005617 // The conversion from switch to lookup tables results in difficult-to-analyze
5618 // code and makes pruning branches much harder. This is a problem if the
5619 // switch expression itself can still be restricted as a result of inlining or
5620 // CVP. Therefore, only apply this transformation during late stages of the
5621 // optimisation pipeline.
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +00005622 if (Options.ConvertSwitchToLookupTable &&
5623 SwitchToLookupTable(SI, Builder, DL, TTI))
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00005624 return requestResimplify();
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005625
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005626 if (ReduceSwitchRange(SI, Builder, DL, TTI))
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00005627 return requestResimplify();
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005628
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005629 return false;
5630}
5631
5632bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI) {
5633 BasicBlock *BB = IBI->getParent();
5634 bool Changed = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005635
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005636 // Eliminate redundant destinations.
5637 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 8> Succs;
5638 for (unsigned i = 0, e = IBI->getNumDestinations(); i != e; ++i) {
5639 BasicBlock *Dest = IBI->getDestination(i);
David Blaikie70573dc2014-11-19 07:49:26 +00005640 if (!Dest->hasAddressTaken() || !Succs.insert(Dest).second) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005641 Dest->removePredecessor(BB);
5642 IBI->removeDestination(i);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005643 --i;
5644 --e;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005645 Changed = true;
5646 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005647 }
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005648
5649 if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 0) {
5650 // If the indirectbr has no successors, change it to unreachable.
5651 new UnreachableInst(IBI->getContext(), IBI);
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00005652 EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(IBI);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005653 return true;
5654 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005655
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005656 if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 1) {
5657 // If the indirectbr has one successor, change it to a direct branch.
5658 BranchInst::Create(IBI->getDestination(0), IBI);
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00005659 EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(IBI);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005660 return true;
5661 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005662
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005663 if (SelectInst *SI = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(IBI->getAddress())) {
5664 if (SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IBI, SI))
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00005665 return requestResimplify();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005666 }
5667 return Changed;
5668}
5669
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005670/// Given an block with only a single landing pad and a unconditional branch
5671/// try to find another basic block which this one can be merged with. This
5672/// handles cases where we have multiple invokes with unique landing pads, but
5673/// a shared handler.
5674///
5675/// We specifically choose to not worry about merging non-empty blocks
5676/// here. That is a PRE/scheduling problem and is best solved elsewhere. In
5677/// practice, the optimizer produces empty landing pad blocks quite frequently
5678/// when dealing with exception dense code. (see: instcombine, gvn, if-else
5679/// sinking in this file)
5680///
5681/// This is primarily a code size optimization. We need to avoid performing
5682/// any transform which might inhibit optimization (such as our ability to
5683/// specialize a particular handler via tail commoning). We do this by not
5684/// merging any blocks which require us to introduce a phi. Since the same
Jesper Antonsson514b6b52018-06-28 10:55:04 +00005685/// values are flowing through both blocks, we don't lose any ability to
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005686/// specialize. If anything, we make such specialization more likely.
5687///
5688/// TODO - This transformation could remove entries from a phi in the target
5689/// block when the inputs in the phi are the same for the two blocks being
5690/// merged. In some cases, this could result in removal of the PHI entirely.
5691static bool TryToMergeLandingPad(LandingPadInst *LPad, BranchInst *BI,
5692 BasicBlock *BB) {
5693 auto Succ = BB->getUniqueSuccessor();
5694 assert(Succ);
5695 // If there's a phi in the successor block, we'd likely have to introduce
5696 // a phi into the merged landing pad block.
5697 if (isa<PHINode>(*Succ->begin()))
5698 return false;
5699
5700 for (BasicBlock *OtherPred : predecessors(Succ)) {
5701 if (BB == OtherPred)
5702 continue;
5703 BasicBlock::iterator I = OtherPred->begin();
5704 LandingPadInst *LPad2 = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(I);
5705 if (!LPad2 || !LPad2->isIdenticalTo(LPad))
5706 continue;
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00005707 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I)
5708 ;
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005709 BranchInst *BI2 = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(I);
5710 if (!BI2 || !BI2->isIdenticalTo(BI))
5711 continue;
5712
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00005713 // We've found an identical block. Update our predecessors to take that
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005714 // path instead and make ourselves dead.
Craig Topper61998282018-06-09 05:04:20 +00005715 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> Preds;
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005716 Preds.insert(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
5717 for (BasicBlock *Pred : Preds) {
5718 InvokeInst *II = cast<InvokeInst>(Pred->getTerminator());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005719 assert(II->getNormalDest() != BB && II->getUnwindDest() == BB &&
5720 "unexpected successor");
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005721 II->setUnwindDest(OtherPred);
5722 }
5723
5724 // The debug info in OtherPred doesn't cover the merged control flow that
5725 // used to go through BB. We need to delete it or update it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005726 for (auto I = OtherPred->begin(), E = OtherPred->end(); I != E;) {
5727 Instruction &Inst = *I;
5728 I++;
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005729 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst))
5730 Inst.eraseFromParent();
5731 }
5732
Craig Topper61998282018-06-09 05:04:20 +00005733 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> Succs;
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005734 Succs.insert(succ_begin(BB), succ_end(BB));
5735 for (BasicBlock *Succ : Succs) {
5736 Succ->removePredecessor(BB);
5737 }
5738
5739 IRBuilder<> Builder(BI);
5740 Builder.CreateUnreachable();
5741 BI->eraseFromParent();
5742 return true;
5743 }
5744 return false;
5745}
5746
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005747bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI,
5748 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005749 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Balaram Makamb05a5572017-07-19 08:53:34 +00005750 BasicBlock *Succ = BI->getSuccessor(0);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005751
Reid Klecknerbca59d22016-05-02 19:43:22 +00005752 // If the Terminator is the only non-phi instruction, simplify the block.
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005753 // If LoopHeader is provided, check if the block or its successor is a loop
5754 // header. (This is for early invocations before loop simplify and
Balaram Makamb05a5572017-07-19 08:53:34 +00005755 // vectorization to keep canonical loop forms for nested loops. These blocks
5756 // can be eliminated when the pass is invoked later in the back-end.)
Serguei Katkov66182d62018-02-08 07:16:29 +00005757 // Note that if BB has only one predecessor then we do not introduce new
5758 // backedge, so we can eliminate BB.
Balaram Makamb05a5572017-07-19 08:53:34 +00005759 bool NeedCanonicalLoop =
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +00005760 Options.NeedCanonicalLoop &&
Vedant Kumare0b5f862018-05-10 23:01:54 +00005761 (LoopHeaders && pred_size(BB) > 1 &&
Serguei Katkov66182d62018-02-08 07:16:29 +00005762 (LoopHeaders->count(BB) || LoopHeaders->count(Succ)));
Reid Klecknerbca59d22016-05-02 19:43:22 +00005763 BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->getIterator();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005764 if (I->isTerminator() && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock() &&
Balaram Makamb05a5572017-07-19 08:53:34 +00005765 !NeedCanonicalLoop && TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock(BB))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005766 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005767
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005768 // If the only instruction in the block is a seteq/setne comparison against a
5769 // constant, try to simplify the block.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005770 if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I))
5771 if (ICI->isEquality() && isa<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1))) {
5772 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I)
5773 ;
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00005774 if (I->isTerminator() &&
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00005775 tryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(ICI, Builder))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005776 return true;
5777 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005778
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005779 // See if we can merge an empty landing pad block with another which is
5780 // equivalent.
5781 if (LandingPadInst *LPad = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(I)) {
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00005782 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I)
5783 ;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005784 if (I->isTerminator() && TryToMergeLandingPad(LPad, BI, BB))
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005785 return true;
5786 }
5787
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00005788 // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
5789 // branches to us and our successor, fold the comparison into the
5790 // predecessor and use logical operations to update the incoming value
5791 // for PHI nodes in common successor.
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +00005792 if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, Options.BonusInstThreshold))
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00005793 return requestResimplify();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005794 return false;
5795}
5796
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00005797static BasicBlock *allPredecessorsComeFromSameSource(BasicBlock *BB) {
5798 BasicBlock *PredPred = nullptr;
5799 for (auto *P : predecessors(BB)) {
5800 BasicBlock *PPred = P->getSinglePredecessor();
5801 if (!PPred || (PredPred && PredPred != PPred))
5802 return nullptr;
5803 PredPred = PPred;
5804 }
5805 return PredPred;
5806}
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005807
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005808bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005809 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Matt Morehouse236cdaf2018-03-22 17:07:51 +00005810 const Function *Fn = BB->getParent();
5811 if (Fn && Fn->hasFnAttribute(Attribute::OptForFuzzing))
5812 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005813
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005814 // Conditional branch
5815 if (isValueEqualityComparison(BI)) {
5816 // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
5817 // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this
5818 // switch.
5819 if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005820 if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(BI, OnlyPred, Builder))
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00005821 return requestResimplify();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005822
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005823 // This block must be empty, except for the setcond inst, if it exists.
5824 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00005825 auto I = BB->instructionsWithoutDebug().begin();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005826 if (&*I == BI) {
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00005827 if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00005828 return requestResimplify();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005829 } else if (&*I == cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition())) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005830 ++I;
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00005831 if (&*I == BI && FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00005832 return requestResimplify();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005833 }
5834 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005835
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005836 // Try to turn "br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F" into a switch instruction.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005837 if (SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BI, Builder, DL))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005838 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005839
Chad Rosier4ab37c02016-05-06 14:25:14 +00005840 // If this basic block has a single dominating predecessor block and the
5841 // dominating block's condition implies BI's condition, we know the direction
5842 // of the BI branch.
5843 if (BasicBlock *Dom = BB->getSinglePredecessor()) {
5844 auto *PBI = dyn_cast_or_null<BranchInst>(Dom->getTerminator());
5845 if (PBI && PBI->isConditional() &&
Craig Topperdfd01ea2017-07-06 16:29:43 +00005846 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
5847 assert(PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB || PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB);
Chad Rosierdfd1de62017-08-01 20:18:54 +00005848 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Chad Rosier4ab37c02016-05-06 14:25:14 +00005849 Optional<bool> Implication = isImpliedCondition(
Chad Rosierdfd1de62017-08-01 20:18:54 +00005850 PBI->getCondition(), BI->getCondition(), DL, CondIsTrue);
Chad Rosier4ab37c02016-05-06 14:25:14 +00005851 if (Implication) {
5852 // Turn this into a branch on constant.
5853 auto *OldCond = BI->getCondition();
5854 ConstantInt *CI = *Implication
5855 ? ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext())
5856 : ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
5857 BI->setCondition(CI);
5858 RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(OldCond);
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00005859 return requestResimplify();
Chad Rosier4ab37c02016-05-06 14:25:14 +00005860 }
5861 }
5862 }
5863
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00005864 // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
5865 // branches to us and one of our successors, fold the comparison into the
5866 // predecessor and use logical operations to pick the right destination.
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +00005867 if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, Options.BonusInstThreshold))
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00005868 return requestResimplify();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005869
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005870 // We have a conditional branch to two blocks that are only reachable
5871 // from BI. We know that the condbr dominates the two blocks, so see if
5872 // there is any identical code in the "then" and "else" blocks. If so, we
5873 // can hoist it up to the branching block.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00005874 if (BI->getSuccessor(0)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
5875 if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005876 if (HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BI, TTI))
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00005877 return requestResimplify();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005878 } else {
5879 // If Successor #1 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00005880 // execute Successor #0 if it branches to Successor #1.
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00005881 Instruction *Succ0TI = BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005882 if (Succ0TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
5883 Succ0TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005884 if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(0), TTI))
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00005885 return requestResimplify();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005886 }
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00005887 } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005888 // If Successor #0 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00005889 // execute Successor #1 if it branches to Successor #0.
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00005890 Instruction *Succ1TI = BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005891 if (Succ1TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
5892 Succ1TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005893 if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(1), TTI))
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00005894 return requestResimplify();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005895 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005896
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005897 // If this is a branch on a phi node in the current block, thread control
5898 // through this block if any PHI node entries are constants.
5899 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition()))
5900 if (PN->getParent() == BI->getParent())
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005901 if (FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DL, Options.AC))
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00005902 return requestResimplify();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005903
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005904 // Scan predecessor blocks for conditional branches.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00005905 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI)
5906 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>((*PI)->getTerminator()))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005907 if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional())
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00005908 if (SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(PBI, BI, DL))
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00005909 return requestResimplify();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005910
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00005911 // Look for diamond patterns.
5912 if (MergeCondStores)
5913 if (BasicBlock *PrevBB = allPredecessorsComeFromSameSource(BB))
5914 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PrevBB->getTerminator()))
5915 if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional())
Alexey Bataev978e2e42017-08-29 20:06:24 +00005916 if (mergeConditionalStores(PBI, BI, DL))
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00005917 return requestResimplify();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005918
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005919 return false;
5920}
5921
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005922/// Check if passing a value to an instruction will cause undefined behavior.
5923static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I) {
5924 Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V);
5925 if (!C)
5926 return false;
5927
Benjamin Kramerd12e82e2012-10-04 16:11:49 +00005928 if (I->use_empty())
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005929 return false;
5930
David Majnemer1fea77c2016-06-25 07:37:27 +00005931 if (C->isNullValue() || isa<UndefValue>(C)) {
Benjamin Kramerd12e82e2012-10-04 16:11:49 +00005932 // Only look at the first use, avoid hurting compile time with long uselists
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00005933 User *Use = *I->user_begin();
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005934
5935 // Now make sure that there are no instructions in between that can alter
5936 // control flow (eg. calls)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith0a12729f2016-08-16 23:57:56 +00005937 for (BasicBlock::iterator
5938 i = ++BasicBlock::iterator(I),
5939 UI = BasicBlock::iterator(dyn_cast<Instruction>(Use));
5940 i != UI; ++i)
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005941 if (i == I->getParent()->end() || i->mayHaveSideEffects())
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005942 return false;
5943
5944 // Look through GEPs. A load from a GEP derived from NULL is still undefined
5945 if (GetElementPtrInst *GEP = dyn_cast<GetElementPtrInst>(Use))
5946 if (GEP->getPointerOperand() == I)
5947 return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, GEP);
5948
5949 // Look through bitcasts.
5950 if (BitCastInst *BC = dyn_cast<BitCastInst>(Use))
5951 return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, BC);
5952
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005953 // Load from null is undefined.
5954 if (LoadInst *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(Use))
Andrew Tricka0a5ca02013-03-07 01:03:35 +00005955 if (!LI->isVolatile())
Manoj Gupta77eeac32018-07-09 22:27:23 +00005956 return !NullPointerIsDefined(LI->getFunction(),
5957 LI->getPointerAddressSpace());
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005958
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005959 // Store to null is undefined.
5960 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(Use))
Andrew Tricka0a5ca02013-03-07 01:03:35 +00005961 if (!SI->isVolatile())
Manoj Gupta77eeac32018-07-09 22:27:23 +00005962 return (!NullPointerIsDefined(SI->getFunction(),
5963 SI->getPointerAddressSpace())) &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005964 SI->getPointerOperand() == I;
David Majnemer1fea77c2016-06-25 07:37:27 +00005965
5966 // A call to null is undefined.
5967 if (auto CS = CallSite(Use))
Manoj Gupta77eeac32018-07-09 22:27:23 +00005968 return !NullPointerIsDefined(CS->getFunction()) &&
5969 CS.getCalledValue() == I;
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005970 }
5971 return false;
5972}
5973
5974/// If BB has an incoming value that will always trigger undefined behavior
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00005975/// (eg. null pointer dereference), remove the branch leading here.
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005976static bool removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BasicBlock *BB) {
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00005977 for (PHINode &PHI : BB->phis())
5978 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHI.getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
5979 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(PHI.getIncomingValue(i), &PHI)) {
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00005980 Instruction *T = PHI.getIncomingBlock(i)->getTerminator();
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005981 IRBuilder<> Builder(T);
5982 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(T)) {
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00005983 BB->removePredecessor(PHI.getIncomingBlock(i));
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005984 // Turn uncoditional branches into unreachables and remove the dead
5985 // destination from conditional branches.
5986 if (BI->isUnconditional())
5987 Builder.CreateUnreachable();
5988 else
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005989 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB ? BI->getSuccessor(1)
5990 : BI->getSuccessor(0));
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005991 BI->eraseFromParent();
5992 return true;
5993 }
5994 // TODO: SwitchInst.
5995 }
5996
5997 return false;
5998}
5999
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00006000bool SimplifyCFGOpt::simplifyOnce(BasicBlock *BB) {
Chris Lattner3f5823f2003-08-24 18:36:16 +00006001 bool Changed = false;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00006002
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00006003 assert(BB && BB->getParent() && "Block not embedded in function!");
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00006004 assert(BB->getTerminator() && "Degenerate basic block encountered!");
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00006005
Dan Gohman4a63fad2010-08-14 00:29:42 +00006006 // Remove basic blocks that have no predecessors (except the entry block)...
6007 // or that just have themself as a predecessor. These are unreachable.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006008 if ((pred_empty(BB) && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) ||
Dan Gohman4a63fad2010-08-14 00:29:42 +00006009 BB->getSinglePredecessor() == BB) {
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00006010 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Removing BB: \n" << *BB);
David Majnemeree0cbbb2016-02-24 17:30:48 +00006011 DeleteDeadBlock(BB);
6012 return true;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00006013 }
6014
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00006015 // Check to see if we can constant propagate this terminator instruction
6016 // away...
Frits van Bommelad964552011-05-22 16:24:18 +00006017 Changed |= ConstantFoldTerminator(BB, true);
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00006018
Dan Gohman1a951062009-10-30 22:39:04 +00006019 // Check for and eliminate duplicate PHI nodes in this block.
6020 Changed |= EliminateDuplicatePHINodes(BB);
6021
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00006022 // Check for and remove branches that will always cause undefined behavior.
6023 Changed |= removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BB);
6024
Chris Lattner2e3832d2010-12-13 05:10:48 +00006025 // Merge basic blocks into their predecessor if there is only one distinct
6026 // pred, and if there is only one distinct successor of the predecessor, and
6027 // if there are no PHI nodes.
Chris Lattner2e3832d2010-12-13 05:10:48 +00006028 if (MergeBlockIntoPredecessor(BB))
6029 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00006030
Michael Zolotukhinad371e02017-12-21 01:22:13 +00006031 if (SinkCommon && Options.SinkCommonInsts)
6032 Changed |= SinkCommonCodeFromPredecessors(BB);
6033
Devang Patel15ad6762011-05-18 18:01:27 +00006034 IRBuilder<> Builder(BB);
6035
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00006036 // If there is a trivial two-entry PHI node in this basic block, and we can
6037 // eliminate it, do so now.
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00006038 if (auto *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin()))
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00006039 if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 2)
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00006040 Changed |= FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PN, TTI, DL);
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00006041
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00006042 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BB->getTerminator());
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00006043 if (auto *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00006044 if (BI->isUnconditional()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006045 if (SimplifyUncondBranch(BI, Builder))
6046 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00006047 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006048 if (SimplifyCondBranch(BI, Builder))
6049 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00006050 }
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00006051 } else if (auto *RI = dyn_cast<ReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006052 if (SimplifyReturn(RI, Builder))
6053 return true;
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00006054 } else if (auto *RI = dyn_cast<ResumeInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006055 if (SimplifyResume(RI, Builder))
6056 return true;
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00006057 } else if (auto *RI = dyn_cast<CleanupReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006058 if (SimplifyCleanupReturn(RI))
6059 return true;
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00006060 } else if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006061 if (SimplifySwitch(SI, Builder))
6062 return true;
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00006063 } else if (auto *UI = dyn_cast<UnreachableInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006064 if (SimplifyUnreachable(UI))
6065 return true;
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00006066 } else if (auto *IBI = dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006067 if (SimplifyIndirectBr(IBI))
6068 return true;
Chris Lattnere42732e2004-02-16 06:35:48 +00006069 }
6070
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00006071 return Changed;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00006072}
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00006073
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00006074bool SimplifyCFGOpt::run(BasicBlock *BB) {
6075 bool Changed = false;
6076
6077 // Repeated simplify BB as long as resimplification is requested.
6078 do {
6079 Resimplify = false;
6080
6081 // Perform one round of simplifcation. Resimplify flag will be set if
6082 // another iteration is requested.
6083 Changed |= simplifyOnce(BB);
6084 } while (Resimplify);
6085
6086 return Changed;
6087}
6088
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00006089bool llvm::simplifyCFG(BasicBlock *BB, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
6090 const SimplifyCFGOptions &Options,
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +00006091 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders) {
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00006092 return SimplifyCFGOpt(TTI, BB->getModule()->getDataLayout(), LoopHeaders,
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +00006093 Options)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006094 .run(BB);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00006095}